JEE Class Companion

Physics
For JEE Main and Advanced

Module-7

Chapter_1 Geometrical Optics

Chapter_2 Wave Optics

Contents_____________________
Chapter_1 Geometrical Optics 1.5 Section C - Velocity in Spherical Mirror
Section A - Plane Mirror Velocity in Spherical Mirror:
Properties of Light 1.5 Velocity of Image 1.22
Ray Optics 1.5 Section D - CUTTING OF MIRRORS

Ray 1.5 Cutting of Mirror 1.24

Beam of Light 1.5 Field of View 1.24
Section E - Combination of Mirrors,
Reflection 1.6
Intensity of light
Law of Reflection 1.6
Combination of Mirrors 1.25
Plane Mirror 1.7
Intensity of Light 1.26
Image of an extended Linear Object 1.7
Section F - Snell's Law, Apparent depth and
Field of View 1.8 Normal shift, Refraction through a Glass slab,
Field of View of Extended Linear Objects 1.9 Lateral shift
Relation Between Velocity of Refraction of Light 1.28
and Object and Image 1.9 Laws of Refraction 1.28
Deviation Produced Plane Rrefraction 1.29
by a Plane Mirror 1.9 Apparent Depth and Normal Shift 1.30
Real or Virtual Image/Object 1.11 Case I : When the Object is in Denser Medium
Rotation of Mirror 1.11 and the Observer is in Rarer medium
Images Formed by Two Plane Mirrors 1.12 (Near Normal Incidence)
Images Due to Parallel Plane Mirros 1.12 Velocity of the Image in Case of
Locating All the Images Formed Plane Refraction 1.31
by Two Plane Mirrors 1.14 Refraction Through a Glass Slab 1.32
Circle Concept 1.14 Apparent Shift Due to Slab When Object
Number of Images Formed is seen Normally Through the Slab 1.32
Apparent Distance Between Object and
by Two Inclined Mirrors 1.14
Observer When Both are in Different
Number of Images 1.14
Medium 1.33
Minimum Length of the Mirror to
Lateral Shift 1.34
See Full Image 1.15
Section G - CRITICAL ANGLE AND TOTAL
Section B - Mirror formula and Magnification
INTERNAL REFLECTION (T.I.R.)
Spherical Mirror 1.16
Critical Angle and Total Internal Reflection (TIR) 1.34
Some Important Definitions 1.16
Condition for TIR 1.35
Rules for Image Formation 1.18 Optical Fibre Cable 1.36
Relation between v,n and R Section H - PRISM
for Spherical Mirrors 1.18 Prism 1.37
Sign Convention 1.19 Graph Between  i 1.38
Magnificaion 1.20 Minimum Deviation and Conditon for
Cases for Image Formation Minimum Deviation 1.39
by Concave Mirror 1.21 Relation Between Refractive Index and
Longitudinal Magnifiation 1.21 the Angle of Minimum Deviation 1.39
Cases for Image Formation Condition for Prism 1.40
by Convex Mirror 1.22 Deviation Through a Prism of Small Angle 1.41
Section I - DISPERSION OF LIGHT Chapter_2 Wave Optics 2.1
Dispersion of Light 1.42 Section A - Interference Problems
Dispersive Power () 1.43 Electromagnetic Spectrum 2.1
Dispersion Without Average Deviation and
Wave Front 2.1
Average Deviation Without Dispersion 1.44
Coherent source 2.1
Section J - REFRACTION FROM A SPHERICAL
Principle of Superposition 2.1
SURFACE
Refraction from a Spherical Surface 1.46 Superposition of two sinusoidal waves 2.2
Velocity of Spherical Reflection 1.47 Interference 2.2
Transverse Magnification 1.48 Section B - YDSE Experiment
Section K - Lens Maker formula and Young's Double Slit Experiment (YDSE) 2.3
Magnification, Image formation by convex and Analysis of Interference Pattern 2.4
concave lens, Combination of lens, Cutting of
Approximation-I 2.5
lens
Approximation-II 2.5
Refraction Through Thin Lenses 1.49
Fringe Width 2.5
Lens Maker Formula 1.50
Sign Convention (Consider Pole as Origin) 1.50 Geometrical Path & Optical Path 2.7
Focus 1.51 Displacement of Fringe 2.8
Rules for Image Formation 1.52 YDSE with Oblique Incidence 2.9
Transverse Magnification Converging Lens 1.52 Shape of Interference Pattern 2.10
Image Formation by a Convex Lens of the YDSE with White Light 2.11
Linear Object 1.53 Section C,D - Other Experiment (Fresnell’s
Image Formation by a Concave Lens of a bilets, etc.) and YDSE thin Film
Linear Object 1.54 Thin Film Interference 2.12
Velocity of the Image Formed by a Lens 1.56 The LLOYD'S Mirror Experiment 2.14
Combination of Lens 1.57 FRESENEL'S Biprism 2.15
Cutting of Lens 1.57 HUYGEN'S Principle 2.16
Parallel Cutting 1.57 Reflection and Refraction 2.17
Section L - Power of lens and Mirror, Silverging
Extra Portion of JEE Main 2.19
of lens, Displacement Method
Section E - Diffraction Single Slit 2.19
Power of a Lens 1.58
Power of Mirror 1.58 Diffraction 2.19
Perpendicular Cutting 1.58 Section F - Polarisation
Silverging of Lens 1.59 Polarisation 2.21
Displacement Method 1.60 Unpolarised Light 2.21
Section M - Chromatic Aberration and Plane Polarised Light 2.21
Achromatism, Optical Instrument + Eye + Partially Polarised Light 2.21
Luminous Intensity
Method of Polarisation 2.21
Chromatic Aberration and Achromatism 1.61
Intensity of Light Emerging from a Polariod 2.21
Extra Portion of JEE Main 1.61
Exercise 2.24
Optical Instruments 1.61
Answer Key 2.140
Definition 1.61
Types of Instruments 1.61
Microscope 1.61
Simple Microscope 1.61
Compound Microscope 1.62
Telescope 1.62
Astronomical Telescope 1.62
Terrestrial Telescope 1.63
Exercise 1.64
Answer Keys 1.103
 Geometrical Optics 1.5

SECTION A - PLANE MIRROR as a stream of energy propagated along the direction

of rays. The rays are directed outward from the
1. Properties of light source of light in straight lines.
(I) Speed of light in vaccum, denoted by c, is equal to
2.2 Beam of Light
3 × 108 m/s approximately
A beam of light is a collection of these rays. There
(ii) Light is electromagnetic wave (proposed by
are mainly three types of beams.
Maxwell). It consists of varying electric field and
magnetic field.
(i) Parallel beam of light
(iii) Light carries energy and momentum.
(iv) The forcula v = f is applicable to light.
E
A search light and the headlight of a vehicle emit a
parallel beam of light. The source of light at a very
large distance like sun effectively gives a parallel beam.
propagation
of light (ii) Divergent beam of light
B

1m 10–3m 7800Å 3600Å 10–9m 10–11m

Radio Micro Infra Visible U.V. x-ray   ray

Wave Wave red light

Electromagnetic spectrum

2. Ray optics
The rays going out from a point source generally
Ray optics treats propagation of light in terms of form a divergent beam.
rays and is valid only if the size of the obstacle is
much greater than the wavelength of light. It concern (iii) Convergent beam of light
with the image formation and deals with the study A beam of light that is going to meet (or converge)
of the simply facts such as rectilinear propagation, at a point is known as a convergent beam. A parallel
laws of reflection and refraction by geometrical beam of light after passing through a convex lens
methods. becomes a convergent beam.

2.1 Ray
A ray can be defined as an imaginary line drawn in
the direction in which light is travelling. Light behaves

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.6 Theory and Exercise Book

3. Reflection (ii) The angle of incidence is equal to the angle of

When a ray of light is incident at a point on the reflection, i.e., i =  r
surface, the surface throws partly or wholly the These laws hold good for all reflecting surfaces either
incident energy back into the medium of incidence. plane or curved.
This phenomenon is called reflection.
Surfaces that cause reflection are known as mirrors Some important points
or reflectors. Mirrors can be plane or curved.
(i) If  i = 0,  r = 0, i.e., if a ray is incident normally
A N B A on a boundary, after reflection it retraces its path.

i O
i r N r
g
C
O B
Plane mirror Concave mirror
Plane mirror Concave mirror
A

i
O
N r

B C
Convex mirror
In the figure 1.5,
Convex mirror
O is the point of incidence, AO is the incident ray,
OB is the reflected ray, ON is the normal at the (ii) None of the frequency, wavelength and speed
incidence. changes due to reflection. However, intensity and
hence amplitude (I  A2) usually decreases.
Angle of incidence
The angle which the incident ray makes with the
normal at the point of incidence is called the angle
of incidence. It is generally denoted by 'i'.
Angle of reflection
The angle which the reflected ray makes with the (iii) If the surface is irregular, the reflected rays on an
normal at the point of incidence is called the angle incident beam of parallel light rays will be in random
of reflection. It is generally denoted by 'r'. direction. Such an irregular reflection is called
diffused reflection.
Glancing angle
The angle which the incident ray makes with the
plane reflecting surface is called glancing angle. It is 4. PLANE MIRROR
generally denoted by 'g'. Plane mirror is formed by polishing one surface of a
g = 90° – i (1) plane thin glass plate. It is also said to be silvered on
one side.
3.1 Law of reflection
it is symbolically Reflecting side
(i) The incident ray, the reflected ray and the normal thin transparent plate
represented as Polished side
to the reflecting surface at the point of incidence, all polished surface

lie in the same plane.

PLANE MIRROR

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.7

A beam of parallel rays of light, incident on a plane mirror

will get reflected as a beam of parallel reflected rays.
Sol.

Formation of image by a plane mirror.

From the argument of similar triangles 45°
O 2cm
OM = IM
i.e., perpendicular distance of the object from the 2 2cm
mirror = perpendicular distance of the image from
the mirror image
2 I

4.1 Image of an extended linear object

1 Draw the images of the extreme points and joined
1 them with a straight line
O M 1 I
d 
d 2

2
2
a a
O I

A d d B

Steps to draw the image :

(i) Drop a perpendicular on the mirror and extend it on
Properties of image of an extended object,
the back side of the mirror.
formed by a plane mirror
(ii) Image always lie on this extended line
1. Size of extended object = size of extended image.
(iii) To exactly locate the image, use the concept:
2. The image is erect, if the extended object is placed
Perpendicular distance of the object from the mirror parallel to the mirror.
is equals to the perpendicular distance from the mirror
of the image. B B'

A A'

3. The image is inverted if the extended object lies

perpendicular to the plane mirror.
O d d I
B B'
EXAMPLE 1 C C'

A mirror is inclined at an angle of 45° with the B A A' B'

horizontal and mirror starts from the origin, an object Object Image
A A'
is kept at x = – 2 cm. Locat its image

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.8 Theory and Exercise Book

4. If an extended horizontal object is placed infront of 4.2 Field of view

a mirror inclined 45º with the horizontal, the image Area in which reflected rays exists is called field of
formed will be vertical. See figure. view. It is the area from which an observer can see
the image of an object. If the observer is outside
this area he will not be able to see the image although
Horizontal incident rays on the
the image will be there.
mirror get reflected in vertical
direction. So the image of
extended object will be vertical
common direction of incident
lights from points A and B field of
Field of view
A B view
I
O
45°
BE  EB' E
AF  FA '
F i
O
B'

A'

EXAMPLE 3

A man is travelling on the A

rod along AB. Find out the

D
B' B length of the road for
image A' A which the image will be O
Q d d 
45° visible to him.
(i) (ii) B' A' 45°
A B
(image) (A)  (B) 3 path
E
(C) 1.5  (D) 2
B
Sol. In the ray diagram shown
A
 AQC ~  DMC
EXAMPLE 2 D
x 3d x
An unnumbered wall clock show time 8 : 12 where 
/2 d
1st term represent hours, 2nd represent minutes. What O
C
Q d d I
time will its image in plane mirror show.
3
 x= path 
2 E
Sol.
3 3 B
 Total length = 
2 2

= 3 (option = B)

Note
Image shows 3 : 48
Most of the problems in optics involving geometry
Short trick can be solved by using similar triangles.
Draw watch on paper and then see it from reverse side.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.9

4.3 Field of view of extended linear EXAMPLE 4

object
An object moves with 5 m/s towards right while
Common field of view of extreme points of the object
the mirror moves with 1 m/s towards the left as
will be the field of view of extended linear object
shown. Find the velocity of image.
Sol. Take  as + direction. object
D
vi – vm = vm – v0 5m/s 1m/s
B B'
common field  vi – (–1) = (–1) – 5
of view mirror
A O A'  vi = – 7m/s
 7 m/s and direction towards left.

E
EXAMPLE 5
5m/s
4.4 Relation between velocity of object In the situation
30° y
and image shown in figure,
find the velocity 10m/s
y x
of image. 60°
Object Image Sol. Along x direction, applying
vi – vm = – (v0 – vm)
x
vi – (– 5 cos 30°) = – (10 cos 60° – (–5 cos 30°))
 v1 = – 5 (1 + 3 ) m/s
From mirror property : Along y direction
xim = – xom v0 = vi
yim = yom vi = 10 sin 60° = 5 3 m/s
and zim = zom
 Velocity of the image
Here xim means 'x' coordinate of image with respect
to mirror. Similarly others have meaning. = 5(1  3)iˆ  5 3jˆ m/s
Differentiating w.r.t time, we get
v(im)x = – v(om)x 4.5 Deviation produced by a Plane mirror
v(im)y = v(om)y Deviation is defined as the angle between directions
v(im)z = v(om)z of the incident ray d the reflected ray (or, the
 For x axis emergent ray). It is generally denoted by .
viG – vmG = – (voG – vmG) N

v iG  v oG A
 vmG = B
2
i i
Here, g
viG = velocity of image with respect to ground O 
vOG = velocity of object with respect to ground.
A'
vmg = velocity of mirror with respect to ground.
Here,  A OB = 
Note =  AOA –  AOB
Valid only for perpendicular component of velocity = 180° – 2i
to the mirror. or,  = 180° – 2i.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.10 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 6 EXAMPLE 7

Two plane mirrors are inclined at an angle  with Find out the angle of deviation
each-other. A ray of light strikes one of them. Find
its deviation after it has been reflected twice-one
from each mirror.
45°
Sol. Case I :
1 = clockwise deviation at A = 180° – 2 i1
2 = anticlockwise deviation at B = 180° – 2i2
Sol. Angle of deviation = 90°

B
EXAMPLE 8

i2 i2 i1 i1 Find out the angle of deviation


O
A
Now, from  OAB, we have
 BOA +  OAB +  ABO = 180°
 + (90° – i1) + (90° + i2) = 180° i
 i1 – i2 = 
As i1 > i2, 1 < 2
Hence, the net angle anticlockwise deviation =2 – 1
= (180° – 2i2) – (180° – 2i1)
= 2(i1 – i2) = 2
Case II :
 / 2–i
 / 2–i

B Sol.
i
i2 i1

O
A

1 = clockwise deviation at A = 180° – 2 i1 1 = For Ist reflection

2 = clockwise deviation at B = 180° – 2 i2 =  – 2i (clockwise)
Now, from  OAB, we have 2 = For 2nd reflection
or  + (90° – i1 ) + (90° – i2) = 180°
 
 i1 + i2 =  =  – 2  – i  (clockwise)
2 
Hence, net clockwise deviation = 2 + 1
= (180° – 2i2) + (180° – 2i1) = 2i

= 360° – 2(i1 + i2) net = 1 + 2

= 360° – 2 =  – 2i + 2i

 Net anticlockwise deviation =

= 360° – (360° – 2) = 2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.11

4.6 Real or virtual image/Object EXAMPLE 9

Object and Image
By what angle the mirror must be rotated such that
Object is defined as point of intersection of incident the reflected ray becomes vertical.
rays. Image is defined as point of intersection of Sol. The diagram below shows the four ways in which
reflected rays (in case of reflection) or refracted rays the reflected ray can become vertical.
(in case of refraction).

incident side
1 30°

incident side
2 virtual point
object For case 1 :
Angle by which the Reflected ray rotates = 30°
real point object
Rays 1 and 2 have originated
from a point source 30
Angle by which the mirror rotates = = 15°
2
(Anticlokwise)
reflected side
reflected side

real
image real
object virtual point (1)
Image
30° 30°
(4)
(2)
(3)
5. ROTATION OF MIRROR

N1 N2 For case 2 :
A R1 D
fixed Angle by which the Reflected ray rotates = 150°
incident C
  Angle by which the mirror rotates = 75°
ray
  R2
(clockwise)


M1 For case 3 :
B
M2 Angle by which the Reflected ray rotates = 300°
Angle by which the mirror rotates = 150°
(clockwise)
For a fixed incident light ray, if the mirror be rotated
For case 4 :
through an angle  (about an axis which lies in the
plane of mirror and perpendicular to the plane of Angle by which the Reflected ray rotates = 210°
incidence), the reflected ray turns through an angle Angle by which the mirror rotates = 105°
2 in same sense. (Anticlokwise)
See figure M1, N1 and R1 indicate the initial position But case (2) & case (3) are not possible as the I.R.
of mirror, initial normal and initial direction of reflected falls on the polished part of mirror. after rotation of
light ray respectively. M2, N2 and R2 indicate the final mirror.
position of mirror, final normal and final direction of  Answer is 15° (Anticlockwise) and 105°
reflected light ray respectively. From figure it is clear (Anticlockwise)
that  ABC = 2 +  = 2( + ) or  = 2.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.12 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 10 6. IMAGES FORMED BY TWO PLANE

MIRRORS
A mirror is placed at the centre of a sphere and it is
rotating with an angular speed . Incident light falls If rays after getting reflected from one mirror strike
on the mirror at the centre of the sphere. Find out second mirror, the image formed by first mirror will
the linear speed of the light spot on the sphere? function as an object for second mirror, and this
process will continue for every successive reflection.

R 6.1 Images due to parallel plane mirrors

EXAMPLE 12
 v=?
Figure shows a point object placed between two parallel
mirrors. Its distance from M1 is 2 cm and that from
Sol. Angular speed of mirror = 
M2 is 8 cm. Find the distance of images from the two
Angular speed of Reflected Ray = 2 mirrors considering reflection on mirror M1 first.
Speed of light spot on the mirror : 2(R)
M1 M2

EXAMPLE 11 2cm

In the previous question instead of spherical wall

8cm
there is a vertical wall at a perpendicular distance d
from the point & where the light is incident.

x Sol. To understand how images are formed see the

Sol. tan =
d x following figure and table.

 x = d tan   You will require to know what symbols like I121


stands for. See the following diagram.
dx d
 dsec2  d
dt dt
I12 1
 d  This last number '1' indicates
= 2  d sec2   2  that light rays are reflected
 dt 
from mirror '1' i.e. M 1
OR I12 is object in this case.
Considering an instantaneous circle of radius dsec.

 M1 M2
ec  6
ds v cos 
5
 v
4
 3
d 2
A
O B
I121 I1 2 I12 I1212
vt = 2dsec
3
(2dcosis a component of v.) 4
v cos  = 2dsec 5
6
2 dsec 
 v= = 2d sec2
cos 

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.13

Incident Ref. Ref. Object Image

Object Image
rays by rays distance distance M2
Rays 1 M1 Rays 2 O I1 AO=2cm AI1=2cm
Rays 2 M2 Rays 3 I1 I12 BI1=12cm BI12=12cm I2 O 5
1 2
Rays 3 M1 Rays 4 I12 I121 AI12=22cm AI121=22cm
Rays 4 M2 Rays 5 I121 I1212 BI121=32cm BI1212=32cm 3 6
4
Similarly images will be formed by the rays striking Sol. Extension of mirror M1 M1

mirror M2 first. Total number of images = .

I21

EXAMPLE 13
Rays 'a' and 'b' strike mirror M1 only and these rays
Two plane mirrors are kept parallel to each other at
will form image I1 at (x, –y), such that O and I1 are
a distance of 2 cm. An object is kept at the midpoint
equidistant from mirror M1. These rays do not form
of the line joining them. Locate the images by drawing
further image because they do not strike any mirror
appropriate Ray diagram.
again. Similarly rays 'd' and 'e' strike mirror M2 only
and these rays will form image I2 at (–x, y), such
that O and I2 are equidistant from mirror M2.
Now consider those rays which strike mirror M2
O
first and then the mirror M1.
1cm 1cm For incident ray 1,2 object is O, and reflected rays
3, 4 from image I2.
Now rays 3, 4 incident on M1 (object is I2) which
Sol.
reflect as rays 5, 6 and form image I21. Rays 5, 6 do
not strike any mirror, so image formation stops.

t step
firs (M2 forms image I2,
3cm 1cm 1cm 3cm of object O)
(M1 forms image M2
1cm 1cm I2, of object I2) I2
p O
te
Thus, it forms an A.P. (x,y)
second s

(–x,y)

M1
Extension
of mirror M1
EXAMPLE 14 (–x,–y)
I21
Consider two perpendicular mirrors. M1 and M2 and
a object O. Taking origin at the point of intersection
of the mirrors and the coordinate of object as (x, y), I2 and I21, are equidistant from M1. To summarize
find the position and number of images. see the following figure Now rays 3,4 incident on
M1 (object is I2) which reflect as rays 5, 6 and form
y d
M2 image I21. Rays 5, 6 do not strike any mirror, so
e
image formation stops.

I2 O(x,y) For rays reflecting first from M1 and from M2, first
(–x,y) a b
image I1 at (x, –y)) will be formed and this will
function as object for mirror M2 and then its image
M1
I12 (at (–x, –y)) will be formed. I12 and I21 coincide.
I1
(x,–y)  Three images are formed

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.14 Theory and Exercise Book

6.2 Locating all the Images formed by 7. NUMBER OF IMAGES FORMED BY

two Plane Mirrors TWO INCLINED MIRRORS.

360
M1 1. if = even number.; number of image

I21(  2)
I1( ) 360
= –1
n


oo

 P (object)
ds

 360
M2
an

2. If = odd number ; number of image


I2 ()
I12 ( 2  ) 360
 –1,
and so on 
If the object is placed on the angle bisector.
Consider two plane mirrors M1 and M2 inclined at
an angle=  +  as shown in figure. Point P is an 360
3. If = odd number ; number of image
object kept such that it makes angle  with mirror 
M1 and angle  with mirror M2. Image of object P
360
formed by M1, denoted by I1, will be inclined by = ,

angle  on the other side of mirror M1.
This angle is written in bracket in the figure besides If the object is not placed on the angle bisector.
I1. Similarly image of object P formed by M 2., 360
denoted by I2, will be inclined by angle  on the 4. If  int eger , then the number of images

other side of mirror M2. This angle is written in
bracket in the figure besides I2. Now I2 will act as = nearest even integer.
an object for M1 which is at an angle ( + 2) on EXAMPLE 15
the opposite site of M1. This image will be denoted
Two mirrors are inclined by an angle 30°. An object
I21, and so on. Think when this will process stop
is placed making 10° with themirror M1. Find the
[Hint : The virtual image formed by a plane mirror
positions of first two images formed by each mirror.
must note be in front of the mirror of its extension.]
Find the total number of images using (i) direct
6.3 Circle concept formula and (ii) counting the images.
Sol. Figure is self explanatory.
50°
1(R) 10°
M1
object
4(2R) O 10°
20°
M2
60°
20°

40°
2(1R)
5(3R)

3(2R) Number of images

(i) Using direct formula

All the images formed will lie on a circle whose centre 360
 12(even number)
is the intersection point of the mirror and radius equal 30
to distance of object from the intersection point  number of images = 12 – 1 = 11

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.15

(ii) By counting H
H'
Consider Fig. 1.25 x M1

x H : head
(Eye) E F : feet
Image formed by Mirror M1 Image formed by Mirror M2
x+y
(angles are measured from (angles are measured from y
the mirror M1) the mirror M2)
10° 20° M2 Image of
+30° observer
y

50° 40° F F'

+30°
z z
70° 80°
Aliter :
+30°
E M1, M2 and E H' F' are similar
110° 100°
+30° M1 M 2 z
 
130° H' F' 2z
140°
+30°
or M1 M2 = H F / 2 = HF / 2
170° 160°
+30°
EXAMPLE 17
Show the Part of the image which man can see in
Stop because next angle Stop because next angle the mirror as shown in the figure.
will be more than 180° will be more than 180°

To check whether the final images made by the a

two mirrors coincide or not : add the last angles and
the angle between the mirrors. If it comes out to be
exactly 360°, it implies that the final images formed b
Sol.
by the two mirrors coincide. Here last angles made a } This part man
can see

by the mirrors + the angle between the mirrors =

160° + 170° + 30° = 360°. Therefore in this case Vector – form
the last imagescoincide. Therefore the number of n
images = number of images formed by mirror M1 +
b
number of images formed by mirror M2 – 1 (as the a
last images coincide) = 6 + 6 – 1 = 11.

8. MINIMUM LENGTH OF THE MIRROR

TO SEE FULL IMAGE. â = Unit vector along the incident ray

EXAMPLE 16 n̂ = Unit normal vector

b̂ = Unit vector along the reflected Ray
Show that the minimum size of a plane mirror,
required to see the full image of an observer is half bˆ = aˆ – 2(a.n)
ˆ ˆ nˆ
the size of the observer.
Note
Sol. See the following figure. It is self explanatory if you
consider lengths 'x' and 'y' as shown in figure.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.16 Theory and Exercise Book

Section B - Mirror formula and Magnification. mirror is known as principle axis or optical axis.

9. SPHERICAL MIRROR
R/2 
9.1 Some Important Definitions P2
R/2 

(i) Spherical Mirrors 

C P1
b P1 R R
sec  R sec 
2 2

P P C
C

R R
Concave mirror Convex mirror If  is very small : R – sec  ~–
2 2
(ii) Paraxial Rays
(vii) Focus (F)
The ray which have very small angle of incidence
If the rays are parallel to principla axis and paraxial then
are known as paraxial rays.
the point of which they appear to converge is known as
(iii) Pole or Vertex focus. Distance of focus from pole then be R/2
It is a point on the mirror from where it is easy to
measure object and image distance.
In Fig. 1.27, the point P is the pole.

F
P P F
PP

(iv) Centre of curvature Concave Mirror

Convex mirror
The centre C of the sphere of which the sperical
mirror is a part, is the centre of curvature of the
mirror. (viii) Focal Length (f)
Focal length is the distance PF between the pole P
(v) Radius of curvature (R)
and focus F along the principal axis.
Radius of curvature is the radius R of the sphere of
which the mirror forms a part.
(ix) Aperture
The line joining the end points of a spherical mirror
R P is called the aperture or linear aperture.
P R C
C
M M

(vi) Principal axis Aperture P

Aperture
Aperture P P

M' M'
P C
C P Principal
Principal (x) Focal plane
axis
axis
Plane passing through focus and perpendicular to
the optical axis called focal plane.
Line joining pole and centre of curvature of the

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.17

EXAMPLE 18 EXAMPLE 20

Find distance on focal plane where parallel and Find the distance CQ if incident light ray parallel to
paraxial rays which are not parallel to optic axis, principal axis is incident at an angle i. Also find the
meet after reflection. distance CQ if i  0.

i
L

/2
R
i
C Q P

F 

P
h
Sol.
i<5°
F' C
f P C P

F(
foc
us
)
Sol. In FFP
R
h cos i =
tan  = 2CQ
f
h=f ( is small). R
 CQ =
2 cos i
Note As i increases cos i decreases.
Hence CQ increases
If the rays are parallel and paraxial but not parallel to
optic axis then they will meet at focal plane. So, paraxial rays meet at a distance equal to R/2
from centre of curvature, which is called focus,
Principal focus (F) is the point of intersection all
EXAMPLE 19
the reflected rays for which the incident rays strike
Find the angle of incidence of ray for which it passes the mirror (with small aperture) parallel to the
through the pole, given that MI || CP. principal axis. In concave mirror it is real and in the
convex mirror it is virtual. The distance from pole
I to focus is called focal length. Aperture (related to
M  the size of mirror) is the diameter of the mirror.


C P

C F P C F P

Sol.  MIC =  CIP =  Concave mirror

MI || CP  MIC =  ICP = 
CI = CP = R
 CIP = CPI = 
C F P C F P
 In CIP all angle are equal
3 = 180°
Convex mirror
  = 60°

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.18 Theory and Exercise Book

9.2 Rules for Image Formation 9.3 Relation Between u,v and R for
The reflection of light rays and formation of images Spherical Mirrors
are shown with the help of ray diagrams. Some A

typical incident rays and the corresponding reflected
rays are shown below.   
O C I P
1. A ray passing parallel to the principal axis, after
reflection from the spherical mirror passes or appears
to pass through its focus (by the definition of focus) Consider the situations shown in figure. A point
object is placed at the point O of the principal axis
of a concave mirror. A ray OA is incident on the
mirror at A. It is reflected in the direction AI. Another
C F P ray OP travels along the principal axis. As PO is
P F C
normal to the mirror at P, the ray is reflected back
along PO. The reflected rays PO and AI interesect
at I where the image is formed.
2. A ray passing through or directed towards focus, Let C be the centre of curvature. The line CA is the
after reflection from the sperical mirror becomes normal at A. Thus, by the laws of reflection,
parallel to the principal axis (by the principal of OAC = CAI. Let , ,  and  denote the angles
reversiblity of light). AOP, ACP, AIP and OAC respectively. As the
exterior angle in a triangle equals the sum of the two
opposite interior angles, we have,
from triangle OAC

C F P =+ (1)
P F C and from triangle OAI
 =  + 2. (2)
Eliminating  from (i) and (ii),
3. A ray passing through or directed towards the centre 2 =  + . (3)
of curvature, after reflection from the spherical mirror,
If the point A is close to P, the angles ,  and  are
retraces its path (as for it i = 0 and so  r = 0)
small and we can write

AP AP
= =
PO PC
P
P F C C F
AP 1 1 2
and   . or   (4)
PI PO PI PC
The pole P is taken as the origin and the principal
4. It is easy to make the ray tracing of a ray incident
axis as the X-axis. The rays are incident from left to
at the pole as shown in below.
right. We take the direction from left to right as the
positive X-direction. The points O, I and C are
situated to the left of the origin P in the figure. The
 quantities u, v and R are, therefore, negative. As the
C F P  distances PO, PI and PC are positives, PO = – u,
PI = – v and PC = – R. Putting in (4),

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.19

1 1 2
 
u  v R

1 1 2
or   (5)
u v R P F C
Although equation (vii) is derived for a special
situation shown in figure, it is also valid in all other (c)
situations with a spherical mirror. This is because
we have taken proper care of the signs of u, v and
R appearing in figure shown. Figure u v R f
(a) –Ve –Ve –Ve –Ve

C = Centre of curvature (b) –Ve +Ve –Ve –Ve

R = Radius of curvature
(c) –Ve +Ve +Ve +Ve
C R

Important Points Regarding Sign Convention

(i) If the point (i) is valid, or convention concides with
right hand co-ordinate (or new Cartesian co-ordinate
Concave
system). If the point (i) is not
(ii) In this sign convention, focal length of a concave
mirror is always negative while the focal length of a
Reflecting Surfaces convex mirror is always positive.
Reflecting surface
Assume the pole to be (0, 0).
9.4 Sign Convention
1. All distances are measured from the pole of the EXAMPLE 22
spherical mirror along the principal axis. (Pole is Find out the position and type of image formed.
considered as origin)
2. Distances measured along the principal axis in the
R=20cm
direction of the incident ray are taken to be positive
while the distance measured along the principal axis O
against the direction of the incident ray are taken to (0,0)
30cm
be negative.
3. Distances measured above the principal axis are taken
to be positive while distances measured below the
principal axis are taken to be negative. 1 1 1
Sol.  
f u v
EXAMPLE 21

1 1 1
  
10 30 v
C
C F P F P 1 1 1 1  3 2 1
      cm
v 30 10 30 30 15

(b)
V = – 15cm (Real image)
(a)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.20 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 23 Note
Find out the position and type of image formed.
Using above relation, following conclusion can be
R=20cm made (check yourself).
Nature of Nature of Nature of
O Object Image Erect
(0,0)
5cm Real Real Inverted
Real Virtual Erect

1 1 1 Virtual Real Erect

Sol.  
f u v Virtual Virtual Inverted

1 1 1
  
10 5 v 9.5.3 From previous; we get

1 1 1 2 1 1 f f –v
     m=  (just a time saving formula)
v 5 10 10 10 f –u f
 V = + 10 (Virtual image)
EXAMPLE 24
9.5 Magnification
Findout the position, height and type of image.
f=10cm
B

h0 4cm
A' 
A C f  O 10cm F

hi
u
B' ve f=10cm
v
9.5.1 Transverse Magnification Sol.
4cm
 ABO ~  A’B’O
10cm F
hi h0
x= 
v u

i h v
 m= h –u 1 1 1
 
0
f v u
 The above formula is valid for both concave and
convex mirror. 1 1 1
  
 Above the optical axis is considered positive and 10 v 10
below to be negative
1 1 1
 hi, h0, v and u should be put with sign.   
v 10 10
 V = + 5cm
9.5.2 In case of successive reflection from mirrors,
the overall lateral magnification is given by hi 5

m1 × m2 × m3 ...., where m1, m2 etc. are 4 10
lateral magnication produced by individual
mirrors.  h  2cm

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.21

9.6 Ca ses for image fo rmat ion by (v) When the object is at F
concave mirror The image of formed at infinity. It is real, inverted
(i) When the object is at infinity and highly enlarged.
The image is formed at F. It is real, inverted and
highly diminished.

C F P

C P
F

(vi) When the object lies between P and F

(ii) When the object lies beyond C (i.e.,
between infinity and C)

O
C F P

C F P
I

The image is formed behind the concave mirror. It

The image is formed between F and C. It is real,
is virtual, erect and enlarged.
inverted and diminished.
(iii) When the object lies at C
9.7 Longitudinal Magnification
O
1 1 1
 
v u f
C F P
By differentiating

I dv du
   0
v 2 u2
The image is formed at C it is real inverted and of
same size. dv v2
  2
du u
(iv) When the object lies between F and C
Longitudinal magnification when the size of object is
quite less with respect to its distance from the pole.
O a Above formula is valid only when the length of object
is very small as compared to the distance of object
C F P
from the pole.

I dv  length of image
du  length of object
The image is formed beyond C (i.e., between C and
u  object distance from the pole.
infinity). It is real, inverted and enlarged.
v  Image distance from the pole.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.22 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 25 v

Show the approximate image of AB in following Object real

image virtual
cases.
–C

A B B' A'
(i)  –f
C F C F
Object is virtual
Object is real Image is real
image is real
A B –C

C
(ii)  For concave mirror
C F A’ F
v
B’
Object is virtual
Object real, image is virtual
image virtual
9.8 Cases for image formation by convex
mirror f
(i) When the object is at infinity u

Object is virtual
Image is real

P F C
For convex mirror

Note

The image is formed at F. It is virtual, erect and

highly diminished.
(ii) When the object lies in between infinity Section C - Velocity in Spherical Mirror
and P
9.9 Velocity in Spherical Mirror : Velocity
of image
(a) Object moving along principal axis :
On differentiating the mirror formula with respect

P F C dv v 2 du dv
to time we get  2 where is the
dt u dt dt

The image is formed between P and F. It is virtual, du

velcoity of image along Principal axis and is the
erect and diminished. dt

In case of image formation unless states otherwise, velocity of the object along Principal axis. Negative
object is taken to be real and we consider only rays sign implies that the image, in case of mirror, always
that are close to the principal axis and that make moves in the direction opposite to that of object.
small angles with it. Such rays are called paraxial This discussion is for velocity with respect to mirror
rays. In practice this condition may be achieved by and along the x axis.
using a mirror whose size is much smaller than the Hence above equation can be written as
radius of curvature of the surface. Otherwise the v2
VI M   (VO M )
image will be distorted. u2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.23

EXAMPLE 28 (c) Object moving parallel to Principal axis

Find velocity of image in the given figure.

1 cm/sec I
P
f=10cm O C F

2 cm/sec
v
P
u
30cm
dv –v 2 du
vx =  2
Sol. Here u = – 30 cm dt u dt
f = – 10 cm On differentiating equation
From using mirror formula,
v
hi =  h 0
1 1 1 u
 
v u f
dh i  dv 1 v du 
v = – 15 cm vy    h0  .  2 
dt  dt u u dt 
v2
VI M   (VO M ) EXAMPLE 27
u2
A gun of mass m1 fires a bullet of mass m2 with a
2
 15  horizontal speed v0. The gun is fitted with a concave
VI – (– 1) =    (2  ( 1))
 30  mirror of focal length f facing towards a receding
bullet. Find the speed of separations of the bullet
7 and the image just after the gun was fired.
 VI = – cm/sec.
4 m1
(b) Object moving perpendicular to principal
v0 v1
axis
m2
From the magnification formula we have,

hi v v
– or hi   ho Sol. Let v1 be the speed of gun (or mirror) just after the
ho u u
firing of bullet.
If a point object moves perpendicular to the principal From conservation of linear momentum.
axis, x coordinate of both the object & the image
m2v0 = m1v1
become constant. On differentiating the above
relation w.r.t time, we get, m2 v 0
or v1 = m1 ...(i)
dh i v dh o

dt u dt
du
Now, = rate at which distance between mirror
dh o dt
Here, = v0 denotes velocity of object
dt and bullet is increasing
= v1 + v0 ...(ii)
dh i
perpendicular to the principal axis and = vy
dt
dv  v 2  du
  
denotes velocity of image perpendicular to the dt  u 2  dt
principal axis.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.24 Theory and Exercise Book

Both the part of mirror have same hollow sphere

v2
Here  m2  1 so its radius of curvature is same therefore no of
u2
images found is 1.
(as at the time of firing bullet is at pole)
If we cut the mirror and shift it the centre of
dv du curvature changes for example in the figure shown
   v1  v 0 ...(iii)
dt dt below. A concave mirror is cut and each part is shifted
by 1mm. Then centre of curvature of each part shift
dv
Here is the rate at which distance between image by 1mm and each part behaves as 2 independent
dt
concave mirror with its centre of curvature at the
(of bullet) and mirror is increasing. So if v2 is the new position.
absolute velocity of image (towards right) then,
dv Image-1
v 2 – v1   v1  v 0
dt
C1
or v2 = 2v1 + v0 ...(iv) 1mm
Therefore, speed of separation of bullet and image C
1mm
will be,
vr = v2 + v0
= 2v1 + v0 + v0
or vr = 2 (v1 + v0) Image-2
Substituting value of v1 from equation (i) we have, Therefore two images are found.
 m 
vr = 2  1  2  v 0 Ans.
 m1  10.1 Field of View

Note

object
Section D - Cutting of Mirrors field of view
of the image
10. CUTTING OF MIRRORS
No. of
images=1

C
C EXAMPLE 28
No. of Image =1
Figure shows a spherical concave mirror with its
\\\ pole at (0, 0) and principal axis along x axis. There
\ is a point object at (–40 cm, 1 cm), find the position
\\
\\\

of image.
\

C C (–40,1)
Object
\\\\
\\

x axis
\

\\
\\ (0,0)
No. of image =1
No. of image = 1
R.O.C=10 cm

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.25

Sol. According to sing convention, Applying mirror formula :

u = – 40 cm
1 1 1
h1 = + 1 cm  
v u f
f = – 5 cm
 v = – 30 cm
1 1 1 For II reflection on plane mirror :
 
v u f u = – 10 cm
 v = 10 cm
1 1 1
   For III reflection on curved mirror again :
v –40 –5
u = – 50 cm
–40 f = – 10 cm
v= cm
7
Applying mirror formula :
h 2 –v 1 1 1
    v = – 12.5 cm
h1 u v u f

EXAMPLE 30
 40 
–  –  1
 h2 = – –v  h   7    1 cm. Find out the position of the final image formed by
1
u –40 7 two reflections. Take the first reflection from M1.
f=20cm
 –40 1  f=10 cm
 The position of image is  cm, – cm 
 7 7  O
45cm 10cm

M2 M1

Sol. f=20cm
f=10 cm

I2 O
Section E - Combination of Mirrors,
5cm I1
45cm 10cm
Intensity of light

M2 M1
11. COMBINATION OF MIRRORS
For M1
EXAMPLE 29
1 1 1
 
Find the position of final image after three successive f v u
reflections taking first reflection on m1.
1 1 1
  –
ROC=20cm 10 v 10

O 1 2
15cm
 
m1 v 10
40cm
 v = + 5 cm
Sol. I reflection: For M2 : u = –60, f = – 20
Focus of mirror = – 10 cm
1 1 1
 u = – 15 cm  
f v u

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.26 Theory and Exercise Book

1 1 1
 –  – Sol. f = 10m
20 v 60
+ve
I1 M1
1  1 1  I2
  – –  20cm 10cm
M2
v  20 60 

 v = – 30 cm

For M2 :
EXAMPLE 31
u = – 10 cm, f = + 10 cm, v = + 5 cm
Find out the position of the final image formed by
two reflections. Take the first reflection from M1. Note

f=20cm
In the above case only one ray will go on the optic
f=10cm axis and the one ray is not responsible for image
O formation.
15cm 30cm

M2 M1
12. INTENSITY OF LIGHT

f=20cm EXAMPLE 33

O Intensity at A due to source is I. Without

Sol. I1 15cm concave mirror, then find out the intensity of
15cm 30cm A after placing concave mirror.

M2 M1
f =10m
For M1 : screen

u = – 30, f = – 20
source
1 1 1 O A
   v = – 60 cm 10cm 10cm
f u v
For M2 :
u = + 15 f = + 10 v = + 30

f =10m
screen
Reversibility of rays

source
EXAMPLE 32
Sol. O A
10cm 10cm
Find out the number and positions of all the images
formed in the figure shown below.
f = 10m

M1 P
I
M2 4(10) 2
20cm 10cm

1 1 1
 
f v u

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.27

–1 1 1 4 I  R 2
  – So intensity from mirror = = 16 I
10 v 10 (R / 2) 2
 v = . Total Intesity = 16 I + I = 17 I
Intensity at A due to reflection = I.
Total = I + I = 2I f=20cm

P Source
EXAMPLE 34 (ii) 30cm 10cm
Intensity at A due to source is I. Without concave
mirror, then find out the intensity of A after placing
concave mirror.
(I) f = 10 cm
P R x
30cm
10cm
30cm 60cm
P
A
Source
Sol.

P = I × 4 (10)2
B
D
P R I R/2 P
Intensity at P =
O C Area
A
Sol. source P I
= 2

60 cm 4 (30) 9
P= I× P
R x
= I × 4(60)2 Now 
60 20
P
Intensity at P = R
Area x=
3
4 (60)2 I Power incident on mirror
=
4(30)2
I
PP =  R 
= 4I 9
Now  PAB ~ ACD
This power will be incident on x2 area
AP AC
  I  R 2
PB CD So Intensity from mirror = I
9  (R / 3)2
30 R So total, I = I + I = 2I
 CD = R =
60 2
Energy at Area of R radius = 4 I × R2
Note
R
Now energy will fall on the screen but at an Area of radius .
2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.28 Theory and Exercise Book

Section F - Snell's Law, Apparent depth and N

Normal shift, Refraction through Incident ray i
a Glass slab, Lateral shift Medium 1 (n1)
Medium 2 (n2)
13. REFRACTION OF LIGHT r

Deviation or bending of light rays from their original refracted ray

N'
path while passing from one medium to another is
This is known as Snell's Law.
called refraction. It is due to change in speed of light
as light passes from one medium to another medium. sin i n 2 v 
Also,   1  1
If the light is incident normally then it goes to the sin r n1 v2 2
second medium without bending, but still it is called For applying in problems remember
refraction. n1 sin i = n2 sin r
Refractive index of a medium is defined as the factor n2
1 n 2 = Refractive Index of the second medium
by which speed of light reduces as compared to the n1
speed of light in vacuum.
with respect to the first medium.
speed of light in vacuum C = speed of light in air (or vacuum)
c
= = = 3 × 108 m/s.
v speed of light in medium
i & r should be taken from normal.
More (less) refractive index implies less (more) speed Special cases :
of light in that medium, which therefore is called • Normal incidence :
denser(rarer) medium. i=0
From snell's law, r = 0
Note N
Incident ray
Higher the value of Refractive index denser Medium 1
(optically) is the medium.
Medium 2 refracted ray
Frequency of light does not change during
refraction N'
Refractive index of the medium relative to vacuum
• When light moves from denser to rarer medium it
 r r bends away from normal.
nvacuum  1;
N
nair  1 ;
nwater (average value) = 4/3 ; A
i
ngiass (average value) = 3/2 B DENSER
I RARER I'

r
r–i
N' C
13.1 Laws of Refraction r>i
(a) The incident ray, the normal to any refracting surface • When light moves from rarer to denser medium it
at the point of incidence and the refracted ray all lie bends towards the normal.
in the same plane called the plane of incidence or N
plane of refraction. A
i
RARER
sin i B
(b) sin r = Constant for any pair of media and for light I I'
r DENSER
of a given wavelength. N'
C

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.29

EXAMPLE 35 4
sin a =
A light ray is incident on a glass sphere at an angle 5
of incidence 60° as shown. Find the angles r, r, e
and the total deviation after two refractions. –1 4
 a = sin
5

e
EXAMPLE 37
r' Find the speed of light in medium 'a' if speed of
r
60° n 3
c
light in medium 'b' is where c =speed of light in
n=1 3
vacuum and light refracts from medium 'a' to
medium 'b' making 45° and 60° respectively with
Sol. Applying Snell's law 1 sin 60° = 3 sin r
the normal.
 r = 30° Sol. From Snell's Law
From symmetry r' = r = 30°
a sin a = b sin b
Again applying snell's law at second surface
c c
1 sin e = 3 sin r  v sin a  v sin b
a b

 e = 60°
Deviation at first surface = i – r c c
sin 45  sin 60
va c/3
= 60° – 30° = 30°
Deviation at second surface = e – r
2c
= 60° – 30° = 30°  va =
3 3
Therefore total deviation = 60°

13.2 Plane Refraction

EXAMPLE 36

Find the angle a made by the light ray when it gets

i1
refracted from water to air, as shown in figure. n1

n2 i2
i2
Air
 1
a n3 i3
i3

 4/3 i4
n4 i4
Water
n5
sin –1 3 / 5 i5

Sol. From Snell's Law

w sin w = a sin a Prove that n1 sin i1 = n2 sin i2 = n3 sin i3 = n4 sin i4
(Remember this). Also Prove that if n1 = n4 then
4 3
   1sin a light rays in medium n1 and in medium n4 are parallel.
3 5

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.30 Theory and Exercise Book

14. APPARENT DEPTH AND NORMAL EXAMPLE 38

SHIFT Find out the following in the figure shown below :
Case I : When the object is in denser
medium and the observer is in rarer
medium (near normal incidence) B
36cm
n2 r
A
B  =4/3 36cm
d' r
i F
n1 d I
i
(a) The apparent distance of the fish from the surface
O as observed by the bird
(b) The apparent distance of the bird from the surface
When an object O is in denser medium of depth 'd' as observed by the fish
and absolute refractive index n1 and is viewed almost apparent depth n 2 d '
normally to the surface from the outside rarer Sol. (a)  
Real depth n1 d
medium (r.i = n2), its image is seen at I. which is at a
distance d from surface AO is the real depth of the 1 d'

object. AI is the apparent depth of the object. Ol is 4 / 3 36
called apparent shift.
 d = 27 cm
According to Snell's law,

n 2 sin i
 n2 = 1 B
n1 sin r

n 2 tan i
or, 
n1 tan r ( i and r are small angles) d'
n1 = 4/3 d=36cm
F
n2 AB AI

n1 = AO AB

B'
n 2 d' apparent depth
= = B
n1 d Real depth n1=1
d=36cm

d'

(b)
Note 36cm
n2=4/3
F
1. The above formula is valid only for paraxial rays.
2. Distances should be taken from the surface.
3. n2 is the reflective index of the medium from where
4/3 d'
ray is going and n1 is the reflective index of the 
medium from where ray is coming 1 36
 d = 48 cm

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.31

EXAMPLE 39 EXAMPLE 40

A concave mirror is placed inside water with its shining Find out the following in the figure shown below :
surface upwards and principal axis vertical as shown. (a) The apparent speed of the fish as observed by the
Rays are incident parallel to the principal axis of concave bird
mirror. Find the position of final image.
(b) The apparent speed of the bird as observed by the
fish

Air
Air 24 cm/s
Water
10cm

B d'
4/3 Water A B
30cm
4/3 30cm

R=40cm 1 cm/s
R=40cm
4/3
F 12 cm/s
Sol. The incident rays will pass undeviated through the
water surface and strike the mirror parallel to its
principal axis. Therefore for the mirror, object is at
. Its image A (in figure) will be formed at focus n2
Sol. (a) VIS  n VO S
which is 20 cm from the mirror. Now for the 1

interface between water and air, d = 10 cm

3
 VI  1  (12 – 1)
d 10 4
 d'    7.5cm
 nw   4 / 3  33 37
   1  VI  +1=
 na  4 4

37 133
VI B  VI – VB   24  cm / sec
14.1 Velocity of the image in case of plane 4 4
refraction (b) n2 = 4/3,
n1 = 1

n1 n2
VIS  VO S
n1
r
i v0 = – 24, vs = + 1

O 4
 vI – 1 = [– 24 – 1]
n2 y 3
x
97
vI = –
3

97
n2 y n  vI f =  12
 y  2 .x 3
n1 x  n1
133
= cm/sec.
dy n 2 dx n2 3
  VIS  VO S
dt n 2 dt n1

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.32 Theory and Exercise Book

15. REFRACTION THROUGH A GLASS Ist Refraction

SLAB Because of the refraction at the first surface, the
When a light ray passes through a glass slab having image of O is formed at I1. For this refraction, the
parallel faces, it gets refracted twice before finally real depth is x and the apparent depth is d. Also, the
emerging out of it. first medium is air and the second is the slab. Thus,
First refraction takes place from air to glass.  d'
  x
1 x
sin i
So,  = sin r ...(i) IInd Refraction
The point I1 acts as the object for the refraction at
the second surface. Due to this refraction, the image
of I1 is formed at I2. Thus.
i
AIR
GLASS 1 d '' t
   d'  x 
r  x  t 
r
t
AIR Shift S=x+t–x–

e

 1
S = t 1 – 
The second refraction takes place from glass to air.  

1 sin r If medium is not air outside the slab

So,   sin e ...(ii)
  surrounding 
S = t 1 –
From equations (i) and (ii), we get  slab 

sin i sin e Important points

  i=e
sin r sin r 1. Rays should be paraxial
Thus, the emergent ray is parallel to the incident 2. Medium on both side of the slab should be same.
ray. 3. Shift comes out from the object
15.1 Apparent shift due to slab when object 4. Shift is independent of the distance of the object
is seen normally through the slab from the slab.
5. If shift comes out +ve then shift is towards the
direction of incident rays and vice versa.


EXAMPLE 41

I1 Calculate the shift produced by the slab having thickness

O s I2
15cm and refractive index 1.5 which is kept in air.
t
x
 1
Sol. shift S = t 1 – 
d''  
d'

 2
= 15 1 –  = 5 cm
 3

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.33

EXAMPLE 42 15.2 Apparent distance between object

and observer when both are in
See the figure. R=20cm
3/2
different medium.
Find the distance
air
of final image A C
O
formed by mirror n1 n2 n3

 1  3cm
Sol. Shift = 3 1 –  21cm
 3/ 2  I1
For mirror object is at a distance O I2
t2
t1
 1  t3
= 21 – 3 1 –  = 20 cm
 3/ 2 d''
d'
 Object is at the centre of curvature of mirror. Hence
B D
the light ray will retrace and image will formed on
the object itself.
d'''

Ist Refraction :
EXAMPLE 43

Findout the distance between image and the mirror n 2 apparent distance of object from interface AB d '
 
as observed by observer in the figure shown below n1 Real distance of object from interface AB t1

n=1.5 f = 40 cm
n 2 t1
d' 
n1

O IInd Refraction :

20cm n 3 apparent distance of I1 from interface CD


n2 Real distance of I1 from interface CD

15cm 10cm
d ''

Sol. n 2 t1
 t2
n1
n=1.5

n3  n 2 
d ''   t1  t 2 
O I n 2  n1 
O' I'
20cm 20cm
5cm
 t1 t 2 
15cm 10cm
= n3  n  n 
 1 2

Final distance of image from observer

 1  2
shift = t  1    15  1 –   5cm = d '' t 3
    3

u = – 40, f = + 40, v = + 20 cm t t t 
d '''  n 3  1  2  3 
the distance between mirror and the image as n
 1 n 2 n 3

observed by observer = 20 – shift = 15 cm

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.34 Theory and Exercise Book

i=60°
Note

If object and observer are in same medium then shift

formula should be used and if both are in different r=45° 10 cm
medium then the above formula of apparent distance
should be used.
Lateral shift
15.3 Lateral Shift
The perpendicular distance between the incident t sin(i  r) 10sin(60  45)
Sol. d= =
ray and the emergent ray, when the light is incident cos r cos 45
obliquely on a parallel sided refracting glass slab is 10sin15
called 'lateral shift'. = = 10 5 sin15
cos 45
N Note
A i
AIR
O GLASS
r i–r
t Section G - Critical Angle and Total Internal
r 90° K
Reflection (T.I.R.)
d
N' B AIR
C
16. CRITICAL ANGLE AND TOTAL
INTERNAL REFLECTION (T.I.R.)
In right - angled triangle OBK, we have
Critical angle is the angle made in denser medium for
 BOK = i – r
which the angle of refraction in rarer medium is 90°.
d When angle in denser medium is more then critical
 sin (i – r) =
OB angle the light ray reflects back in denser medium
following the laws of reflection and the interface
or, d = OB sin (i – r) ...(i)
behaves like a perfectly reflecting mirror. In the figure.

In right angled triangle ON B, we have N N N

ON ' r
cos r = r 90° rarer
OB A
I I'
C
t i i>C r=i B
or, OB =
cos r denser
O N' N' N'
Substituting the above value of OB in equation (i),
we get O = object
NN = Normal to the interface
t
d= sin(i – r) ...(13) II = Interface
cos r
C = Critical angle :
EXAMPLE 44 AB = reflected ray due to T.I.R.
Find the lateral shift of light ray while is passes When i=C
through a parallel glass slab of thickness 10 cm placed then r = 90°
in air. The angle of incidence in air is 60° and the
angle of refraction in glass is 45°. –1 n r
 C  sin n
d

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.35

16.1 Conditions of TIR Sol. Since the incident light is in rarer medium. Total
Internal Reflection can not take place.
Circle of
illuminance
1
r 90° –1 1
C = sin = 30°

c 3
d 2   i = 2C = 60°
h
Applying Snell's Law. 1 sin 60° = 2 sin r

3
sin r 
(a) light is incident on the interface from denser medium. 4
(b) Angle of incidence should be greater than the critical
angle (i > c). Figure shows a luminous object placed  3
 r  sin –1  
in denser medium at a distance h from an interface  4 
separating two media of refractive indices r and
d . Subscript r & d stand for rarer and denser EXAMPLE 47
medium respectively. What should be the value of angle  so that light entering
In the figure ray 1 strikes the surface at an angle normally through the surface AC of a prism (n = 3/2)
less than critical angle C and gets refracted in rarer does not cross the second refracting surface AB.
medium. Ray 2 strikes the surface at critical angle
A
and grazes the interface. Ray 3 strikes the surface
making an angle more than critical angle and gets
internally reflected. The locus of points where ray
strikes at critical angle is a circle, called circle of

illuminance. All light rays striking inside the circle of C B
illuminance get refracted in rarer medium. If an
Sol. Light ray will pass the surface AC without bending
observer is in rarer medium, he/she will see light
since it is incident normally. Suppose it strikes the
coming out only from within the circle of illuminance.
surface AB at an angle of incidence i.
If a circular opaque plate covers the circle of
illuminance, no light will get refracted in rarer medium A
and then the object can not be seen from the rarer
medium. Radius of C.O.I can be easily found.
i
n=3/2
EXAMPLE 45 
C B
Find the max. angle that can be made in glass
i = 90° – 
medium ( = 1.5) if a light ray is refracted from
For the required condition :
glass to vacuum.
90° –  > C
Sol. 1.5 sin C = 1 sin 90°, where C = critical angle.
or sin (90° – ) > sin C
sin C = 2/3  C = sin–12/3
or cos  > sin C

EXAMPLE 46 1 2
= 
3/ 2 3
Find the angle of refraction in a medium (n = 2) if
light is incident in vacuum, making angle equal to 2
twice the critical angle. or  < cos–1
3

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.36 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 48 Sol. It is required that all possible r should be more than

A ray of light from a denser medium strikes a rarer critical angle. This will be automatically fulfilled if
medium at an angle of incidence i. if the reflected and minimum r is more than critical angle.
the refracted rays are mutually perpendicular to each Angle r is minimum when r is maximum i.e. C (Why ?).
other, what is the value of the critical angle ? Therefore the minimum value of r' is 90° – C.
For T.I.R.
Rarer
r ( R ) (90 – r)min > C
90 – rmax > C
i 90° Denser for rmax
i ( D)
 imax = 90°
when i = 90°, r = C
Sol. From Snell's law, we have 90° – C > C
sin i  R D  C < 45°
 or, =  ...(i)
sin r  D R  sin C < sin 45°

sin r 1 1
  
sin i n 2

According to the given problem,  n 2

i + r + 90° = 180°
or, r = 90° – i
Substituting the above value of 'r' in equation (i), rarer (n2)
we get r –i
1 

sin(90 – i )
= sin i or,,  = cot i ...(ii)

i
1 i>C
–1 denser n1
By definition C = sin   i>C


–1  1 
or, C = sin  cot i  (using equation (ii)
  Graph between d and i :
when i  C
or, C  sin –1 (tan i )
=r–i
and n1 sin i = n2 sin r
16.2 Optical Fibre Cable
Cylindrical n 
n r  sin –1  1 sin i 
n
 2 
90–r
r
–1  n1 
i so   sin  n sin i  – i ...(1)
 2 

Find out the range of n for which ray will show when i > C :
T.I.R through curved surface. then =–2i ...(2)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.37

Section H - Prism

17. PRISM
 – 2C
A homogeneous solid transparent and refracting

–C medium bounded by two plane surfaces inclined at
2
an angle is called a prism :

i=C  i
3-D View
i
2

Note

If the angle between (0,  C) , then there are two
possible values of i.. 2

VARIABLE REFRACTIVE INDEX

If R.I. is a function of y :
taking an small element of y of width dy i

dy r Refraction through a prism


dx
P
A
( y) N NN' & N'N" are normals
 N"
r i
ray r1 e
ent r2 em
dy incid erg
en
t ra
dx N' y
y Q R
Base

Here
(a) PQ and PR are refracting surfaces.
i (b) QPR = A is called refracting angle or the angle of
Now 1 sin i =  (y). sin r prism (also called Apex angle.)

dy (c)  = angle of deviation

tan = = tan (90° – r)
dx (d) For refraction of a monochromatic (single wave
dy sin i length) ray of light through a prism;
or cot r = so sin r 
dx (y)  = (i + e) – (r1 + r2)

dy  2 (y) – sin 2 i and r1 + r 2 = A

 =
dx sin i   = i + e – A.
y x
dy dx
0
2
 (y) – sin i 2

0
sin i Note

I. If ray crosses two surface which are inclined to each

Note other then we use the concept of prism
II. If ray crosses two plain parallel surfaces then we
use concept of slab.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.38 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 49 i1 = 60°;

A ray of light is incident on one face of a prism A = 30°

( = 1.5) at an angle of 60°. The refracting angle of Hence 30° = 60° + i2 – 30° = 30° + i2
the prism is also 60°. Find the angle of emergence
 i2 = 0
and the angle of deviation. Is there any other angle
of incidence, which will produce the same deviation? The angle of emergence is zero. This means that
the emergent ray is perpendicular to the second face.
Sol. Angle of incidence = i = 60°
Since i2 = 0, the anlge of incidence at the second
At point P, face is zero.

sin 60 1.5  r2 = 0

 A
sin r1 1 Now, r1 + r 2 = A
60° or, r1 = A = 30°
P Q
1 60° e
 sin r1 = r1 r2 We know,
3

B C
sin i1 sin 60 3/2
or, r1  35°6 =  
sin r1 sin 30 1/ 2
Using r1 + r2 = A,
we get r2 = A – r1 = 60° – 35°6 = 24°44 3 = 1.732

sin r2 1
At point Q, sin e  1.5
17.1 Graph between  and i

 sin e = 1.5 sin 24° 44

 sin e = 0.63 

 e = 39° max

 deviation =  = (i + e) – A = 60° + 39° – 60° min

= 39°
If i and e are interchanged, deviation remains the imin i
i=e i=90°
same. Hence same deviation is obtained for angles (e=90°) e=imin
i=x i=y
of incidence 60° and 39°. e=y e=x

EXAMPLE 50 (1) Variation of  versus i (shown in Figure).

A ray of light makes an angle of 60° on one of the For one  (except  min) there are two values of
faces of a prism and suffers a total deviation of 30° angle of incidence. If i and e are interchanged then
on emergence from the other face. If the anlge of we get the same value of  because of reversibility
the prism is 30°, show that the emergent ray is principle of light
perpendicular to the other face. Also calculate the
(2) There is one and only one angle of incidence for
refractive index of the material of the prism.
which the angle of deviation is minimum.
Sol. The angle of deviation
(3) Right hand side part of the graph is more tilted then
 = (i1 + i2) – A the left hand side.
Here,  = 30°,

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.39

17.2 Minimum Deviation and Condition for

A
Minimum Deviation or, r=
2
The angle of deviation depends on the anlge of incidence
Also, A+=i+e
in a particular way. When the angle of incidence is small,
or, A + m = i + i
the deviation is large. As i increase,  decreases rapidly
and attains a minimum value and then increases slowly A  m
or, i
with increase of i. The minimum value of  so attained 2
is called the minimum deviation (m ) . The refractive index of the material of the prism is
given by
 A
sin i
 (Snell 's law)
m sin r
i e
m r1 r2

 A  m 
sin  
i B C  2 
or, = A ...(20)
Condition sin
2
Theory and experiment shows that  will be
minimum when the path of the light ray through the If surrounding medium has refractive index = ns
prism is symmetrical.
i.e., angle of incidence = angle of emergence  A  m 
sin  
or, i=  e np  2 
then = A
For the refraction at the face AB, we have ns sin
2
sin i
 (Snell 's law)
sin r1
EXAMPLE 51
or, sin i =  sin r1, A ray of light incident at 49° on the face of an
sin e equilateral prism passes symmetrically Calculate the
and,  refractive index of the material of the prism.
sin r2
Sol. As the prism is an equilateral one, A = 60°. As the
or, sin e =  sin r2 ray of light passes symmetrically, the prism is in the
  sin r1 =  sin r2 position of minimum deviation.
or, r1 = r 2 A 60
So, r= = = 30°
Hence, the condition for minimum deviation is 2 2
i = e and r1 = r2 ....(19) also, i = 49°

sin i sin 49 0.7547

17.3 Relation Between Refractive Index   = sin r  sin 30  0.5 = 1.5
and the Angle of Minimum Deviation
When  = m, we have
e=i EXAMPLE 52

and r1 = r2 = r (say) The refracting angle of the prism is 60° and the
We know refractive index of the material of the prism is 1.632.
Calculate the angle of minimum deviation.
A = r1 + r2 = r + r = 2r

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.40 Theory and Exercise Book

Sol. Here, A = 60° ;  = 1.632 B

 A  m  A
sin  
 2 
Now,   i
 A r1 r2
sin  
2

 60  m   60  m  A C
sin   sin  
 2   2  when imin = 0
or, 1.632 
60 sin 30 
sin from eq. (2) A–0<C
2
A<C
i.e. If A  C, no rays are reflected back from the
 60  m 
or, sin   = 1.632 × sin 30° second surface i.e. all rays are refracted from sec-
 2 
ond surface.
= 1.632 × 0.5 (c) If 2C  A > C, some rays are reflected back from
 60  m  the second surface and some rays are refracted from
or, sin   = 0.816 second surface, depending on the angle of incidence.
 2 
 is maximum for two values of i
60   m  imin (corresponding to e = 90º) and i = 90º
or,  5442'
2 (corresponding to emin).
m = 49° 27

imin A
17.4 Condition for Prism –C C

(a) Relation between prism angle A & critical angle C

such that ray will always show T I R at BC :
For imin : ns sin imin = np sin (A – C)
For this (r2)min > C ...(i)
If i < imin then T.I.R. takes place at second refracting
For (r2)min, r1 should be maximum and surface PR.
for (r1)max B

 imax = 90° A Condition for max :

(r1 )max  C i = 90° or e = 90°
i
r1 r2
(r2 )max  A – C
i
Now from eq. (i) A – C > C Grazing Grazing
incidence emergence
A > 2C A C

i.e. A > 2C, all rays are reflected back from the n sin (A – C) = sin e
second surface.
e = sin 1 [n sin(A – C)]

(b) The relation between A & C such that ray will al- A
ways cross surface BC. C
e
Grazing
For this (r2)max < C incidence
A–C
(A – r1)max < C
A – (r1)min < C ..(2) max  i  e  A
(r1)min = 0
max = 90 + sin –1[n sin(A  C)] – A

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.41

EXAMPLE 53 17.5 Deviation Through a Prism of Small

Angle
Find the minimum and maximum angle of deviation
for a prism with angle A = 60° and  = 1.5 If the angle of the prism A is small, r 1 and r2
Sol. Minimum deviation
(as r1 + r2 = A) and i and e will be small.

The angle of minimum deviation occurs when i = e For the refraction at the face AB, we have
and r1 = r2 and is given by
sin i
 = sin r
1
 A  m 
sin  
  2 
A i
sin or,  = r (since i and r1 are small angles,
2 1

sin i1  i1 and sin r1  r1 )

 –1 A
 m = 2sin   sin  – A
 2
A
Substituting  = 1.5 and A = 60°, we get
i e
m = 2 sin–1 (0.75) – 60° = 37°
r1 r
2

Maximum deviation (Grazing incidence

B C
or Grazing emergence) :

The deviation is maximum when i = 90° or e = 90°

that is at grazing incidence or grazing emergence.  For refraction at the face AC, we have

Let i = 90° sin e

 = sin r
2
–1  1 
 r1 = C = sin  

e
or,  = r ( e and r2 are small angles, so sin e
2
–1  2 
 r1 = sin    42
 3 ~
– e and sin r2 ~
– r2)

 r2 = A – r1 = 60° – 42° = 18°  e = r2

Now, deviation produced by a prism
sin r2 1
Using sin e   , we have  = (i + e) – A

i=90° e=90° or,  = (r1 + r2) – A

sin e =  sin r2
r1r2
= 1.5 × sin 18° or,  = (r1 + r2) – A

 sin e = 0.463 or,  = A – A [ r1 + r2 = A]

 e = 28° or,  = ( – 1) A ...(20)

 Deviation = max The above formula is valid for all positions of the
prism provided the angle of the prism A is small
= (i + e) – A
(say  10°).
= 90° + 28° – 60° = 58°

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.42 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 54 EXAMPLE 56

A prism having a refracting angle 4° and refractive

7
index 1.5 is located in front of a vertical plane mirror For a prism, A = 60º, n  . Find the minimum
3
as shown. A horizontal ray of light is incident on the
prism. What is the angle of incidence at the mirror ? possible angle of incidence, so that the light ray is
refracted from the second surface. Also find max.
A
Sol. In minimum incidence case the angles will be as
4°
shown in figure
Applying snell’s law :

B C 7
1 × sin i min  sin (A – C)
3
Sol.
A 7
 (sin A cos C – cos A sin C)
3
4°

 A
 imin A-C
B C C

The deviation suffered by refraction through the

small angled prism is given by
 = ( – 1)A = (1.5 – 1) × 4° = 2°
This gives the angle of incidence 2° at the mirror. 7 3 3 1
  sin 60 1   cos60  
3 7 7 2

EXAMPLE 55  imin = 30º

Refracting angle of a prism A = 60º and its refractive  max = imin + 90º – A
index is, n = 3/2, what is the angle of incidence i to get = 30º + 90º – 60º = 60º.
minimum deviation. Also find the minimum deviation.
Assume the surrounding medium to be air (n = 1). Note
Sol. For minimum deviation,

A
r1 = r 2 = = 30º
2
Section I - Dispersion of Light
Applying snell’s law at I surface

3
18. DISPERSION OF LIGHT
1 × sin i = sin 30º The angular splitting of a ray of white light into a
2
number of components and spreading in different
 3 directions is called Dispersion of Light. [It is for
 i  sin -1  
4 whole Electro Magnetic Wave in totality]. This
phenomenon takes place because waves of different
3  wavelength move with same speed in vacuum but
 min  2sin –1   –
4 3 with different speeds in a medium.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.43

Therefore, the refractive index of a medium depends EXAMPLE 57

slightly on wavelength also. This variation of
The refractive indices of flint glass for red and violet
refractive index with wavelength is given by
light are 1.613 and 1.632 respectively. Find the
Cauchy's formula.
angular dispersion produced by a thin prism of flint
Cauchy's formula
glass having refracting angle 5°.
b Sol. Deviation of the red light is r = (r – 1)A and
n() = a +
2 deviation of the violet light is v = (v – 1) A.

where a and b are positive constants of a medium. The dispersion = v – r

= (v – r)A
VIB GYOR
 = (1.632 – 1.613) × 5°
  freq. 
= 0.095°

Note Notes

* Such phenomenon is not exhibited by sound waves.

Angle between the rays of the extreme colour Deviation of beam (also called from deviation)
in the refracted (dispersed) light is called angle of   y  (ny  1)A
dispersion. nv, nr and n are R.I. of material for violet, red and
y

   v  r (Fig. (a)) yellow colours respectively.

Fig. (a) and (c) represents dispersion, whereas in fig. Numerical data reveals that if the average value of m is
(b) there is no dispersion. small  v  r is also small and if the average value of m
is large  v  r is also large. Thus, larger the mean
white light deviation, larger will be the angular dispersion.

air
medium
r
v
18.1 Dispersive power ()
  y = mean deviation or
deviation in the Dispersive power of the medium of the material of
red
violet beam prism is given by :
(a)
yellow
n v – nr
red all parallel to 
air one another ny – 1
yellow
  0
violet •  is the property of a medium.
For small angled prism (A  10°) with light incident
white ray
at small angle i :
medium
(b) nv – nr  v – r 
ny – 1 = y = y
r  y  v
angular dispersion
Red =
deviation of mean ray (yellow)
Yellow
Violet
nv  nr
[ny = if ny is not given in the problem]
For prism of small A and with small i, 2
   v  r  (nv  nr )A
• n – 1 = refractivity of the medium for the
corresponding colour.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.44 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 58

Refractive index of glass for red and violet colours

A
are 1.50 and 1.60 respectively. Find 1 '

(a) The refractive index for yellow colour,

2
approximately  A'

(b) Dispersive power of the medium.

v   R 1.50  1.60
Sol. (a)  r ~
– = = 1.55 Figure shows two thin prisms placed in contact in
2 2
such a way that the two refracting angles are reversed
v – R with respect to each other. Suppose, the refracting
1.60 – 1.50
(b)    – 1 = = 0.18. angles of the two prisms are A and A and their
r 1.55 – 1
dispersive power and  and  respectively.
Consider a ray of light for which the refractive indi-
EXAMPLE 59 ces of the materials of the two prisms are  and .
Assuming that the ray passes through the prisms in
Calculate the dispersive power of crown and flint
symmetrical situation, the deviations produceed by
glass-prism from the following data. For crown glass
the two prisms are
v = 1.522 R = 1.514
1  ( – 1) A
For flint glass
v = 1.662 R = 1.644 and 2  ( '– 1)A '
Sol. For crown glass As the two deviations are opposite to each other,
v = 1.522 R : 1.514 the net deviation is

  1 – 2
V  R 1.522  1.514
 Y = = = 1.518
2 2  ( – 1)A – ( '– 1) A ' ...(1)
Hence, the dispersive power of crown glass If white light passes through the combination, the
net deviation of the violet ray is
v –  R 1.522 – 1.514
 =  –1 = = 0.01544  v  ( v – 1)A  ( v'  1) A '
Y (1.518 – 1)

  = 0.01544 and that of the red ray is

For flint glass : r  ( r – 1)A  ( v'  1) A '

v = 1.662 R = 1.644 The angular dispersion produced by the combination is

 'v  'R 1.662  1.644  v – r  ( v –  r )A  ( ' v   ' r ) A' ...(2)

 '  = = 1.653
2 2 The dispersive power are given by

 'v –  R' 1.662 – 1.644 v – r

 '  = = 0.0276 
 '– 1 (1.653 – 1) y  1

' – '
v r
18.2 Dispersion without average deviation and '   '  1
y
and average deviation without dispersion
Thus, by (2), the net angular dispersion is

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.45

 v  r  ( y – 1) A  ( ' y – 1) ' A' ...(3) EXAMPLE 60

The net deviation of the yellow ray i.e., the aver- Find the angle of the flint glass prism which should
age deviation, is, by (1) be combined with a crown glass prism of 5° so as to
give dispersion but no deviation.
 y  ( y – 1)A  ( ' y – 1) A ' ...(4)
For crown glass : v = 1.523; R = 1.515
For flint glass : v = 1.688 ; R = 1.650
Dispersion without Average Deviation Sol. For no deviation
If the combination is not to produce a net average
deviation in the beam, y should by 0. By (4), the A'   – 1 
 
required condition is A   '– 1 

( y – 1)A  ( ' y – 1) A ' ...(5)

  –1
Using this in (3), the net angular dispersion pro- or, A'   A
  '– 1 
duced is

 v  r  ( y – 1)A(  –  ') ...(6) v  R

Now,  =
2
By choosing  and  different and the refracting
angles to satisfy (5), one can get dispersion without 1.523  1.515
=
average deviation. 2
= 1.519
Average Deviation without Dispersion.
If the combination is not to produe a net dispersion,  'v   'R 1.668  1.650
'    1.659
2 2
 v  r  0 , By (iii)

( y – 1) A  ( ' y – 1)  ' A ' ....(7)  1.519 – 1 

 A'    5 = 3.94°
 1.659  1 
By (2), this condition may also be written as

( v –  r )A  ( 'v –  'r ) A' ....(8)

EXAMPLE 61
The net average deviation produced is, by (1),
Find the angle of a prims of dispersive power 0.021
  ( y – 1) A  ( 'y – 1) A' and refractive index 1.53 to form an achromatic
combination with the prism of angle 4.2° and
 ' –1 A' dispersive power 0.045 having refractive index 1.65.
 ( y – 1) A 1 – y 
  y – 1 A  Also calculate the resultant deviation.
Sol.  = 0.021  = 1.53
By (7)
 = 0.045  = 1.65
( ' y – 1) A '  A = 4.2°

( y – 1) A ' For no dispersion

so that the net average deviation produced by the    '  '  0

combination is or, ( – 1)A   '( '– 1)A '  0

   'A '( '– 1) 0.045  4.2  (1.65 – 1)

  ( y – 1)A  1 –  ...(9)
 '  or, A  
( – 1) 0.021  (1.53 – 1)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.46 Theory and Exercise Book

Net deviation So 1   2   ( 2 – 1 ) ...(4)

 +  = ( – 1) A + ( – 1) A
Since, the arc PM (of length S) subtends an angle
= – 11.04° (1.53 – 1) + 4.2° (1.65 – 1)  at the centre of curvature
= – 3.12°
S
=
R
Note
Also in the paraxial approxiamation

S S
= and  =
R v
Section J - Refraction from a Spherical Using these expressions in Eq. (4) with proper signs,
Surface we are left with,

19. REFRACTION FROM A SPHERICAL 1  2  2 – 1

 
–u v R
SURFACE
Consider two transparent media having indices of
 2 1  2 – 1
refraction 1 and 2, where the boundary between or –  ...(5)
v u R
the two media is a spherical surface of radius R. We
assume that 1 < 2. Let us consider a single ray Although the formula (5) is derived for a particular
leaving point O and focussing at point I. Snell’s law situation, it is valid for all other situations of refraction
applied to this refracted ray gives, at a single spherical surface.
1 sin 1 = 2 sin 2 Important point for above formula
• Above formula is valid only for paraxial ray.
+ve
P • u,v,R should be put along with sign
1
d 2 • 2 is r.i. of medium in which rays is going and 1 is
   the r.i. of medium from which rays are coming.
O M C I
2
1
u R EXAMPLE 62
v Findout the position of the image formed and draw
Because 1 and 2 are assumed to be small, we can the appropriate ray diagram
use the small angle approximation R=10cm
sin 
n=1.5
(angles in radians) and say that O

1 1 = 2 2 ...(1)
30cm
From the geometry shown in the figure.
1 =  +  ...(2) u = – 30 cm R = + 10 cm

and  = 2 +  ...(3) n 2 n1 n 2 – n1
Sol.  – 
Eqs. (1) and (3) can be combined to express 2 in v u R
terms of  and . Substituting the resulting
1.5 1 0.5
expression into Eq. (2) then yields.   
v 30 10
1
 =  (   )   1.5 0.5 1
2   –
v 10 30

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.47

1.5 0.5 EXAMPLE 64


v 30 Findout the position where parallel rays will meet
after coming out of the sphere and draw the
30  1.5
 v= = 90 cm (Real) appropriate ray diagram
0.5
n=1 n=1.5
R=10cm

air R=10cm
n=1.5
O
90 I
30cm
n 2 n1 n 2 – n1
Sol. – 
v u R

EXAMPLE 63 1.5 1 0.5

 – 
Findout the position of the image formed and draw v  10
the appropriate ray diagram
1.5 0.5
 
R=10cm v 10

n=1 n=1.5 15
 v=  30
0.5
O
5cm

For IInd
Sol. n2 = 1.5
1 1.5 1 – 1.5
n1 = 1 – =
v 10 –10
u = – 5cm
R = – 10 cm  v=+5

n 2 n1 n 2 – n1 n=1.5
– 
v u R
I1
1.5 1 0.5 R=10cm 5cm I2
  –
v 5 10 10cm

1.5 –0.5 1
  –
v 10 5
19.1 Velocity of Spherical Refrection
R=10cm

n=1 n=1.5 n1 n2

I O
5cm

1.5 –2.5 n 2 n1 n 2  n1
   
v 10 v u R
 v = – 6 cm

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.48 Theory and Exercise Book

differentiate with respect to time 19.2 Transverse Magnification

n 2 dv n1 du If i and r are very small

–  0
v 2 dt u 2 dt tan i  sin i  i
tan r  sin r  r
dv  n   v 2  du
  1  2 
dt  n 2   u  dt n1 n2
h0
n1 v 2 i
VIS  VOS r
n2 u2 hi
u v
2
n1 v
VI  Vs  . (v O  v s )
n2 u2 hi
 tan r =
v

EXAMPLE 65 hi
 r ...(1)
Find the velocity of image in the shown below v
n=air
h0
30 tan i =
n2=1.5 u
O
2m/s h0
 i ...(2)
u
R=10cm Again, by applying snells law :

n 2 n1 n 2 – n1 n1 sin i = n2 sin r
– 
v u R  n1 i  n2 r ...(3)
 From (1), (2), (3)
n n – n1 n1
 2  2 
v R u h i n1  v 
m=   
h0 n2  u 
n 2 (n 2 – n1 )u  n1R
 
v Ru

n 2 Ru EXAMPLE 66
 v = (n – n )u  n R = 90 cm
2 1 1 Findout the position of the image formed and draw
the appropriate ray diagram.
n 2 n1 n 2 – n1
–  u = –30 cm
v u R
R = + 10 cm
By differentiating :

n 2 dv 1 du R=10cm
– .  . 0
v 2 dt u 2 dt
n1=1 n2=1.5
2
dv 1 v du
  . . O
dt  2 u 2 dt
30cm
2 120cm
dv 1 v
   2 = + 12 m/sec
dt 1.5 u 2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.49

Sol. Case I : for first Refraction

n 2 n1 n 2 – n1
Sol. – 
v u R n 2 n1 n – n1 R=10cm
– = 2
R=10cm v u R n=1.5

n=1
n2=1.5 1.5 1 0.5
   x
v x 10
O I3 I2
90cm I1 30cm 90cm
30cm 1.5 0.5 1
30cm   –
120cm v 10 x

1.5 1 0.5 1.5 0.5x – 10

    
v 30 10 v 10x

1.5 0.5 1 15x

  –  v
v 10 30 0.5x – 10

1.5 0.5 v=

 
v 30  x = 20 cm
 v = + 90
Mirror will form the image of I1 30 cm behind it as Case II :
shown in the figure. n2 = 1.5
For the second refraction : n1 = 1
u = – 150 cm R = + 10
R = – 10 cm u=–x O
n1 = 1.5 v = 90 cm
n2 = 1 x = 30 cm
1 1.5 –0.5
 
v 150 –10 Note

1 0.5 1
  –
v 10 100

1 4 Section K - Lens Maker formula and

 
v 100 Magnification, Image formation
by convex and concave lens,
 v = 25 cm (Real)
Combination of lens, Cutting of
lens
EXAMPLE 67
Find out the value of x for which the image is formed 20. REFRACTION THROUGH THIN
on the object itself. LENSES
R=10cm Lens
n=1.5 A lens is a transparent medium bounded by two
O refracting surfaces such that at least one of the
refracting surfaces is curved. (or spherical)
x

90cm

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.50 Theory and Exercise Book

Types of lenses Important points for the above formula :

Broadly, lenses are of the following types : (1) Rays should be paraxial


(2) v, u, R1 and R2 should be put with the sign.
R R R R1 R2
(3) R1 is the radius of curvature of that surface on
R1 R2
which the ray strikes first.
(4) Lens should be thin.
Convexo-convex Equiconvex Plano convex Concavo-
lens or Biconvex lens lens convex lens
(5) Medium on both sides of the lens should be same.

R1  R R1 20.2 Sign Convention (consider pole as

R2 R2
R R
origin)
(i) Whenever and wherever possible, rays of light are
Biconcave Equiconcave Plano-concave Convexo-concave taken to travel from left to right.
lens lens lens lens
(ii) Distances are measured along the principal axis from
the optical centre of the lens.
Principal axis (iii) Distances measured along the principal axis in the
The line joining the centres of curvature of the two direction of the incident rays are taken as positive
bounding surfaces is called the principal axis. while those measured against the direction of the
incident rays are taken negative.
(iv) Distances measured above the principal axis are taken
C2 C1 C1 C2 as positive and those measured below the principal
axis are taken as negative.

20.1 Lens Maker formula

For first refraction :
O I O I
s l
O Figure I
Figure II
t
u v1
v

 s (  –  s )
– ...(1) I O
v1 u = R1

thickness of lens t is negligible

Figure III
For second refraction :

s  s – 
–  ...(2) Figure u v t R1 R2
v v1 R2
(i) –ve +ve +ve +ve –ve
Adding (1) and (2) equation we get
(ii) –ve –ve –ve –ve +ve
1 1  μ  1 1  (iii) +ve +ve +ve +ve –ve
   1   
v u  μ s  1R R 2 

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.51

20.3 Focus
1    1 1 
If the rays are parallel to optical axis and paraxial  – 1  –
 f   s  1R R 
2
then the point where they meet or appears to meet
is known as focus of the system. 1 1.5   1 1
or,  – 1   
f  1  60 15 
 f = + 24 cm
focus
Note

In the lens maker formula if u , v = f.

1    1 1 
  – 1  – 
f  s  1R R 2 

Substituting in the lens maker formula : converging Diverging

lens lens.
1 1 1
–  (lens formula)
v u f
Since for converging and diverging lenses
Lenses have two focii called first and second focus Focal length of lens depends on surrounding
medium.
If f = + ve implies converging and if f = – ve
implies diverging lens.

Ist
focus EXAMPLE 69
st
I focus Calculate the focal length of the lens shown in the figure.

30cm
60cm
1.5


nd
2 focus nd
2 focus.

EXAMPLE 68 1    1 1 
Sol.   – 1  – 
Calculate the focal length of a biconvex lens in air f  s  1R R 2 

if the radii of its surfaces are 60 cm and 15 cm.

Refractive index of glass = 1.5 1  1  1 
  1.5 – 1   –    
Sol. Consider a light ray going through the lens as shown. f  30  60  
it strikes the convex side of 60 cm radius and concave  f = 120 cm
side of 15 cm radius while coming out.
30cm
R1 R2
60cm
 1  1

1.5

R1 = + 60 cm, R2 = – 15 cm

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.52 Theory and Exercise Book

If in the above case direction of rays is reversed.

1    1 1 
  – 1  – 
f  s  1R R 2 
F F F

1  1  1 
  (1.5 – 1)  – –  –  
f  60  30   Only two rays from the same point of an object are
needed for image formation and the point where the
f = + 120 cm
rays after refraction through the lens intersect or
This Illustration shows that focal length does not
appear to intersect, is the image of the object. If
depend on the incident ray direction.
they actually intersect each other, the image is real
and if they appear to intersect the image is said to
be virtual.

EXAMPLE 70
Findout the position of the image formed.
u = + 30 cm, f = + 10 cm

1 1 1
20.4 Rules For Image Formation Sol.  –
f v u
(i) A ray passing through the optical centre of the lens f=10cm
proceeds undeviated through the lens. (By definition 1 1 1
  –
of optical centre) 10 v 30
30cm
1 1 1
  
v 10 30
P P
300
 v= = 7.5 cm
40

Pole is the intersection of the ray which goes

undeviated through the lens and the optical axis. 20.5 Transverse Magnification Converging
lens.
(ii) A ray passing parallel to the principal axis after
refraction through the lens passes or appear to pass
through the focus. (By the definition of the focus)
h0

 f 2f
2f f
u hi

F v
P F P
h0
tan   ...(1),
u
(iii) A ray through the focus or directed towards the focus,
hi
after refraction from the lens, becomes parallel to the tan   ...(2)
v
principal axis. (Principle of reversibility of light)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.53

from eq. (2) / (1) The image is formed at F. It is real, inverted and
highly diminished.
hi v
m= h  u
0
(ii) When the object is beyond 2F :

EXAMPLE 71

Findout the position, height and nature of the image F 2F

formed. 2F F
f=10cm

2cm

30cm The image is formed between F and 2F. It is real,

inverted and diminished

Sol. u = – 30 cm
(iii) When the object is at 2F :
f = + 10 cm f=10cm

h0 = + 2 cm 2cm 15cm

1 1 1 30cm 1cm F 2F
 –
f v u 2F F

1 1 1
  
10 v 30
The image is formed at 2F. It is real, inverted and
1 1 the same size as the object.
 
v 15
 v = + 15 (iv) When the object is between F and 2F :

hi v

h0 u
F 2F
2F F
hi 15
 
2 –30
 hi = – 1 cm The image is formed beyond 2F (i.e., between 2F
 Real, inverted, diminished and ). It is real, inverted and enlarged.
(v) When the object is at F :
21. IMAGE FORMATION BY A CONVEX
LENS OF THE LINEAR OBJECT
(i) When the object is at infinity : F 2F
2F F

F
The image is formed at infinity. It is real, inverted
and highly magnified.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.54 Theory and Exercise Book

(vi) When the object is between F and O : 21.1 Image Formation by a Concave Lens
of a Linear Object
(a) Real object case

2F F F 2F

x
The image is on the same side as the object is. It is
virtual, erect and magnified.
u=–x, f=–f
(vii) Virtual object case for converging lens : from lens formula

1 1 1
 –
v x f

1 1 1
– 
v f x
2f f O
If x 
v–f
x If x  0
v  0'

u=+x
(b) Virtual object case :
f=+f

1 1 1
from lens formula – 
v x f

1 1 1
 
v f x
if x = 0, v 
x
if x = , v  f
u = +x, f = – f
Graphs for converging lens from lens formula

1 1 1
 
v x f
v
O-Real O-Virtual If x = 0  v = 0
I-Real I-Real
If x < f ; v= +u
2f
If x is just smallesr than f
v  +
–2f –f u
If x is just greater than f , then v  – 
O-Real
I-virtual If x  
v–f

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.55

Graphs for diverging lenses.

f = 20 cm
v
A 5cm
O-Virtual 2F B F
I-Real

f
u Sol. For B :
–f 1 1 1
 –
O-Real O-Virtual f v u
I-virtual I-virtual 1 1 1
  
20 v 35
EXAMPLE 71 1 1 1
  –
An object is placed in front of a converging lens of v 20 35
focal length 10 cm and image formed is double the
f = 20 cm
size of object. Then find out the position of object.
Case I : If the image formed is real A 5cm A' B'
2F B F F 2F
hi
– 2 140/3 cm
h0

v 140
  –2  v = – 2u  v=
u 3
A B = (vB – vA)
1 1 1
 –
f v u 140
= – 40
3
1 1 1
 – – 20
10 2v u = cm
3
1 3
 –
10 2u
EXAMPLE 74
 u = – 15 cm
Findout the linear length of the image of the object
Case II : If the image formed is virtual shown in figure.

hi
2 f = 20 cm
h0
 v = 2u 1mm

1 1 1 60cm
 –
f v u
Sol. Here the length of the object is very small then
1 1 1
  –
10 2u u 1 1 1
– 
1 1 v u f
 –
10 2u
By differentiating
 u=–5 cm
dv v 2

EXAMPLE 73 du u 2
Findout the linear length of the image of the object u = –60
AB shown in figure. f = + 20

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.56 Theory and Exercise Book

1 1 1 1 1 1
    –
f v 60 v 10 15
 v = 30 150
 v  30
dv v 2 5

du u 2 1 1 1
 –
dv (30)2 f v u
 
1 (60)2 By differentating :

1 dv du
 dv = mm 0 –
4 v 2dt dt u 2
= length of the image dv du
 0  – v2  u2
Note
du dv
 
Differentiating in solving 73 & 74 (Trick) u2 v 2
dv v 2
 
du u 2
21.2 Velocity of the image formed by a (30)2
lens  dv   (1 – 2) = – 4 (1)
(15)2

1 1 1 v2
from    (vI – vL ) = (v – vL)
v u f u2 o
differentiate the above eq.  (vI – 2) = 4 × – 1
 vI = – 2
1 dv 1 du
–  0
v 2 dt u 2 dt
dv v 2 du EXAMPLE 76
 
dt u 2 dt Findout the velocity of the image of the object
v2 shown in the figure.
v IL  VOL
u2 f=10cm/s
2cm/s
EXAMPLE 75

Findout the velocity of the image of the object shown

15cm
in the figure.
f=10cm/s
1cm/sec
hi v
Sol. 
h0 u
O
15cm
hi v
 h u
0
2cm/s

1 1 1 dh i v dh 0
Sol.  –  
f v u dt u dt

1 1 1 30
     2 = – 4 cm/sec (downwards)
10 v 15 –15

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.57

21.3 COMBINATION OF LENS. –2

= 0.5 
f1
f2
10
Peq  P1  P2 10
 f1   –10cm
0.5  –2

1    1 1 
  – 1  – 
P2 f 2  s  1R R 2 
P1

Peq = P1 + P2  4  1 1 
=  – 1   
 3   10 10 
1 1 1
  1 1 2 
feq f1 f 2  f =  
2 3  10 

 30 
Important points :  f2     15cm
 2 
(1) Rays should be paraxial f3 = – 10 cm
(2) Lens should be thin
1 1 1 1
(3) Lenses should be kept in contact   
feq f1 f 2 f 3
(4) f1, f2, f3, ....... should be put with sign.
(5) f1, f2, f3 ........... are the focal length of lenses in the 1 2
= –
surrounding medium. 15 10
(6) If feq = + ve then system will behave as converging 150
 feq = = – 7.5 cm
system. –20
If feq = – ve then system will behave as diverging
system. 22. CUTTING OF LENS.
22.1 Parallel Cutting
EXAMPLE 77
Findout the equivalent focal length of the
combenation of lenses shown in the figure.
Surrounding medium is air. O I O I

4

3

1.5


R=10 cm R=10 cm O I
R=10 cm

1    1 1 
Sol.   – 1  – 
f1  s   R1 R 2 
No. of images in all the cases = 1
 1 1 
= (1.5 – 1)  – –   Principle axis does not shift
 10 10 

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.58 Theory and Exercise Book

f=10
(1)
I2
1cm 1cm
1cm u 1cm
(ii) I1 5cm (2)

Note

I1
2cm
1cm
1cm Section L - Power of lens and Mirror,
15cm Silverging of lens, Displacement
2cm
Method
I2
22.2 Power of a Lens
f = 10 cm
1
hi v Power = (diopter)
 f
h0 u
where f  meter
hi 30
  and f should be put with sign
–1 –15
 h = + 2 (upwards) power of converging lens. = + ve
1 1 1 Power of diverging lens. = – ve
 –
f v u
1 1 1 22.3 Power of Mirror
  
10 v 15
1
1 1 1 Power = – (diopter)
  – f
v 10 15
where f  meter
150
 v= = 30 cm and f should be put with sign.
5
Total distance = 2 + 2 + 2 = 6 cm Power of converging mirror = + ve
1 1 1 Power of diverging mirror = – ve
(iii)  –
f v u
1 1 1 22.4 Perpendicular Cutting
  
10 v 5
1 1 1 R
 – R
 P
v 10 5
50
 v–  –10cm (1)
5
hi v

h0 u

h i 10
   hi = –2 cm
–1 5 1  1  1 
 ( – 1)  –  –  
Distance = 1 + 1 = 2 cm f  R  R 

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.59

1 2 P/2 23. SILVERGING OF LENS.

  ( – 1) P/2
f R

1 1 
 ( – 1) – 0 
f1 R 

( – 1)
= Peq = 2P + Pm
R

f = 2f 1 2 1
 –  –
fe q f fm

EXAMPLE 78
1 1 2
  –
Find out the value of x so that the image is formed f eq fm f
on the object itself.

x
30cm

f=10cm 1 1  1 1 
f=10cm  – 2   .....
feq fm  f 1 f 2 
Sol.
Important points :
Case I : When the lens forms the image on the pole of the
mirror (1) Rays should be paraxial
(2) Lenses should be thin
1 1 1
 – (3) All the lenses should be in contact.
f v u
(4) f  ,f m should be put along with the sign.
1 1 1
  – (5) If feq = – ve  concave,
10 30 – x
feq = + ve  convex,
1 1 1 If feq =   plane mirror
  –
x 10 30

 x = 15 cm EXAMPLE 79
Case II : When the lens forms the image on the centre of Find out the value of x so that the image will form
curvature of the mirror
on object itself.
1 1 1 O
 
20 x 10 R=10cm
x
  1.5 R=10cm
1 1 1
  –
x 10 20

 x = 20 cm
1 1   1 1 
Sol.  – 2 (0.5)    
feq f m   10 10  

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.60 Theory and Exercise Book

1 1 2 d=y– x ...(4)
 f   – 10 After solving eq. (3) & (4)
eq
Dd D–d
 f eq  –5cm y= x=
2 2
The system is equivalent to a concave mirror of 1 1 1
focal length 5 cm from  
y x f
Object must be at the centre of curvature 2 2 1 D2 – d2
   f
 x = 2 ( 5) = 10 cm Dd D–d f 4D
Note
x

Section M - Chromatic Aberration and

Achromatism, Optical
24. DISPLACEMENT METHOD Instrument + Eye + Luminous
For the formation of the real image by convex lens Intensity
minimum distance between object and image is 4f,
f being the focal length of the lens. If the distance 25. CHROMATIC ABERRATION AND
between object and screen (D) is greater than 4f ACHROMATISM
then there are two positions of the lens for which
The refractive index of the material of a lens varies
the image of object on the screen is distinct and
slightly with the wavelength and hence, the focal
clear. In these two positions the distance of object
length is also different for different wavelengths.
and image from lens are interchange.
In the visible region, the focal length is maximum
for red and minimum for violet. Thus, if white light
x y is used, each colour forms a separate image of
the object.
d h2

D h1
Violet
y x Red
For first refraction :
fR
u=–x h0 = h0 Red
v=+y hi = – hi fv Violet

–h1 –y (a)
 ...(1)
h0 x

For second refraction :

Violet
u=–y v=+x Red
hi = – h2 h0 = h0

h 2 –x
  ...(2)
h0 y fR fV

(1) × (2)
Red
h 20  h1h 2  h 0  h1h 2
Violet
(b)
Now D = x + y, ...(3)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.61

The violet rays are deviated more and hence, they EXTRA PORTION OF JEE MAIN
form an image closer to the lens as compared to 26. OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
the image formed by the red rays. If light is inci-
dent on the lens from left to right, the violet image 26.1 Definition
is to the left of the red image for convex lens and it Optical instruments are used primarily to assist the
is to the right of the red image for the concave lens. eye in viewing an object.
In the first case, the chromatic aberration is called 26.2 Types of Instruments
positive and in the second case, it is negative. Thus, Depending upon the use, optical instruments can
a proper combination for a convex and a concave be categorised in the following way :
lens may result in no chromatic aberration. Such a OPTICAL INSTRUMENT
combination is called an achromatic combination for
the pair of wavelenghts. Camera Projector Telescope Microscope

Pinhole Lens Simple

White light

Astronomical Terrestrial
f
Refracting Reflecting Gallalian Binocular

27. MICROSCOPE
1  1 1  It is an optical instrument used to increase the visual
 ( v – 1)    ...(1) angle of near objects which are too small to be seen
fv R
 1 R 2 
by naked eye. Microscopes are of two types viz.
simple microscope and compound microscope.
1  1 1 
 ( R – 1)    ...(2) 27.1 Simple Microscope
fR R
 1 R 2 
It is also known as magnifying glass or magnifier
Eq. (1) – eq. (2) and consists of a convergent lens with object between
its focus and optical centre and eye close to it. The
1 1  1 1  image formed by it is erect, virtual, enlarged and on
  ( v –  R )  – 
fv fR  R1 R 2  same side of lens between object and infinity.

f R – f v ( v –  R )  1 1 
 ( y – 1)  –  I
f R .f v ( y  1) R
 1 R 2  O

2F F
f R .f v  f12 u  F
v 0
 and f R – f v  df

df  O

fy2 fy 0

1 1 1 D
 
feq f1 f 2 Here, Magnifying power
visual angle with instrument 
df eq df1 df 2 = Maximum visual angle for unaidedeye = 
 – – – 0
f2 f12 f 2 2
hi h0
for achromatism dfeq = 0 Now,  = =
v u
df1 df 2 with, 0 = h0/D
  2 0
f12 f2
 h0 D D
M.P. =  = × h =
1 2 0 u 0 u
 0
f1 f2 Now, two possibilities are there :

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.62 Theory and Exercise Book

(A) Image is at infinity (far point) (A) Final image is at infinity ( far point)
If v =  u = f (from lens formula) e = f e
D D
So, M.P. = = v D
u f  M.P = –  
u  fe 
Note
where L = u + fe
Here parallel beam of light enters the eye i.e., eye is Note
least strained.
A microscope is usually considered to operate in this
(B) Image is at D (Near point) mode unless stated otherwise.
In this situation, v = – D, so that,
1 1 1
– = (B) Final image is at D (near point)
D u f
D D For eye - piece . ve = D ,
or, =1+ 1 1
u f 1
 – u = f
D D e e
So, M.P. = 1 +
f
1 1  D
Note  u = 1  
e D  fe 
Here final image is closest to eye i.e. , eye is under v  D
maximum strain. M.P .= – 1  
u  fe 
27.2 Compound Microscope feD
with L = v + f  D
e
L fe
ue
f0
u v
F0 Fe
O • • •
F0

I
IMPORTANT POINTS
ve
1. As magnifying power is negative, the image seen
in a microscope is always truly inverted, i.e., left is
It consists of two convergent lenses of short focal
turned right with upside down simultaneously.
lengths and apertures arrangedco-axially.
Lens f0 is the objective or field lens and fe is the 2. Resolving Power : The minimum distance
eye-piece or ocular. Objective has smaller aperture between two lines at which they are just distinct is
and focal length than eye-piece. The separation called limit of resolution and reciprocal of limit of
between objective and eye-piece can be varied. resolution is called resolving power.
Magnifying Power 1 1
R.P. =  x  = 2sin //
 hi D hi D 
= = u × h = h × u
0 e 0 0 e
28. TELESCOPE
But for objective, It is an optical instrument used to increase the visual
v hi v angle of distant large objects. Telescopes mainly
m= i.e., h = – are of two types viz. astronomical and terrestrial.
u 0 u
28.1 Astronomical Telescope :
v D
So, M.P. = –   where, e +  = L It consists of two converging lenses placed coaxially
u  ue  with objective having large aperture and a large
Now two possibilities are there : focal length while the eye- piece having smaller

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.63

aperture and focal length. The separation between 28.2 Terrestrial Telescope :
eye- piece and objective can be varied.
Magnifying power
visual angle with instrument 
= visual angle for unaided eye = 
0
f0 fe
IF f
f0 L fe u=
v = f0 ue
u = 
F0  I M
0 Fe F 0  Field
0 lens IM 
F0 y M Erecting lens
fe 
Field lens f0  2f 2f

E ye lens
Astronomical Telescope If a lens of short focal length f is placed at 2f from
h the intermediate image at a distance 2f on the other
0 = f &  = h/(– ue) side of it and this image will act as an object for
0
eye- lens which will produce erect image with
 f0 
M.P. = –   with L = f0 + ue respect to the object; this lens is called erecting
 ue 
lens and as for it m = – 1, the MP and length of
Now two possibilities are there telescope for relaxed eye will be

(A) Final image is at infinity ( far point) f0 f0

M.P. = – f (–1) = f , L = f0 + fe + 4f
Here, v =  ue = fe e e

So, M.P. = – (f0/ fe) with, L = f0 + fe

Note
(A) Galilean Telescope
Usually , a telescope operates in this mode unless
stated otherwise.
L

(B) Final image is at D ( near point)

IM
Here, v=D
1 1 1 1 1  fe 
 – u = f = u = f 1  D  f0
D e e e e  
f0
f0  f e 
So, M.P. = – f 1  D 
e  
feD Here the convergent eye- piece of astronomical
with L = f0 + f  D
e telescope is replaced by a divergent lens.
Note
Here M.P. = f0 / fe with , L = f0 – fe
1. The above discussion is that of the refracting
telescope.
2. Reflecting Telescope : If the field lens of
refracting telescope is replaced by a converging
mirror, then the telescope becomes a reflecting
one, where M.P. = f /f 0 e

fe

f0

Figure 1.123

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.64 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

Section A - Plane Mirror 7. A point object is kept in front of a plane mirror. The
plane mirror is doing SHM of amplitude 2cm. The
1. A point source of light is placed in front of a plane mirror.
plane mirror moves along the x-axis and x-axis is
(A) Only the reflected rays close to the normal normal to the mirror. The amplitude of the mirror is
meet at a point when produced backward. such that the object is always infront of the mirror.
(B) All the reflected rays meet at a point when The amplitude of SHM of the image is
produced backward. (A) zero (B) 2 cm
(C) Only the reflected rays making a small angle
(C) 4 cm (D) 1 cm
with the mirror, meet at a point when produced
backward.
8. An insect of negligible mass is sitting on a block of
(D) Light of different colours make different images.
mass M tied with a spring of force constant k. The
block performs SHM with amplitude A infront of a
2. A watch shows the time as 3 : 25. What will be the
plane mirror placed as shown. The maximum speed
time that appears when seen through a plane mirror ?
of insect relative to its image will be
(A) 8 : 35 (B) 9 : 35
(C) 7 : 35 (D) 8 : 25 k
(A) A
M
3. If a ray of light is incident on a plane mirror at an
angle 60° from the mirror surface, then deviation A 3 k
(B)
produced by mirror is : 2 M
(A) 30° (B) 60° insect 60°
k M
(C) 90° (D) 120° (C) A 3
M

4. When light is reflected from a mirror a change occurs A k

in its : (D)
2 M
(A) phase, (B) frequency,
(C) wavelength, (D) speed
9. An object is initially at a distance of 100 cm from a
plane mirror. If the mirror approaches the object at
5. The images of clouds and trees in water always less
a speed of 5 cm/s. Then after 6 s the distance
bright than in reality –
between the object and its image will be :
(A) because water is forming the image dirty
(A) 60 cm (B) 140 cm
(B) because there is an optical illusion due to which
the image appears to be less bright (C) 170 cm (D) 150 cm
(C) because only a portion of the incident light is
reflected and quite a large portion goes mid water 10. Two mirrors are placed perpendicular to each other.
(D) because air above the surface of water contains A ray strikes the first mirror and after reflection from
a lot of moisture the first mirror it falls on the second mirror. The ray
after reflection from second mirror will emerge:
6. A rays is incident at an angle 38º on a mirror. The (A) Perpendicular to the original ray
angle between normal and reflected ray is (B) Parallel to the original ray
(A) 38º (B) 52º (C) At 450 to the original ray
(C) 90º (D) 76º (D) At 600 to the original ray

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.65

11. If an object is placed unsymmetrically between two 17. The largest distance of the image of a real object
plane mirrors, inclined at the angle of 600, then the from a convex mirror of focal length 20 cm can be :
total number of images formed is (A) 20 cm
(A) 5 (B) 4 (B) infinite
(C) 2 (D) infinite
(C) 10 cm

12. When a plane mirror AB is placed horizontally on (D) depends on the position of the object.
level ground at a distance of 60 metres from the
foot of a tower, the top of the tower and its image 18. A concave mirror of radius of curvature 20 cm
in the mirror subtends, an angle of 90° at B. The forms image of the sun. The diameter of the sun
height of the tower is : subtends an angle 1° on the earth. Then the diameter
(A) 30 metre of the image is (in cm) :
(A) 2/9 (B) /9
(B) 60 metre (C) 20 (D) /18
(C) 90 metre
(D) 120 metre.
A B 19. A convex mirror has a focal length = 20 cm. A
convergent beam tending to converge to a point 20
Section B, C, D, E - Mirror formula and cm behind convex mirror on principal axis falls on
Magnification, Veloci ty in it. The image if formed at
Spherical Mirror, Cutting of
(A) infinity (B) 40 cm
Mirrors, Combination of Mirrors,
Intensity of light (C) 20 cm (D) 10 cm

13. In image formation from spherical mirrors, only

paraxial rays are considered because they : 20. A candle is kept at a distance equal to double the
focal length from the pole of a convex mirror. its
(A) are easy to handle geometrically
magnification will be :
(B) contain most of the intensity of the incident light
(C) form nearly a point image of a point source 1 1
(A) – (B)
(D) show minimum dispersion effect. 3 3

14. A convex mirror has a focal length f. A real object, 2 2

(C) (D) –
placed at a distance f in front of it from the pole, 3 3
produces an image at
(A) 2 f (B) f/2 21. A concave mirror gives an image three times as large
(C) f (D)  as the object placed at a distance of 20 cm from it.
For the image to be real, the focal length should be :
15. If an object is 30 cm away from a concave mirror
of focal length 15 cm, the image will be (A) 10 cm (B) 15 cm

(A) erect (B) virtual (C) 20 cm (D) 30 cm

(C) diminished (D) of same size
22. The focal length of spherical mirror is
16. A concave mirror cannot form :
(A) Maximum for red light
(A) virtual image of virtual object
(B) Maximum for blue light
(B) virtual image of a real object
(C) real image of a real object (C) Maximum for white light
(D) real image of a virutal object (D) Same for all lights

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.66 Theory and Exercise Book

Section F - Snell's Law, Apparent depth and 28. A ray of light travelling in glass (g = 3/2) is incident
Normal shift, Refraction through on a glass air surface at the critical angle. If a thin
a Glass slab, Lateral shift layer of water (w = 4/3) is now poured on the glass
air surface, at what angle will the ray of light emerge
23. When a wave is refracted : into air at the water air surface?
(A) its path must change (A) 60° (B) 30°
(B) its amplitude must change (C) 45° (D) 90o

(C) its velocity must change

29. Light traveling through three transparent
(D) its frequency must change substances follows the path shown in figure.
Arrange the indices of refraction in order from
24. A ray incident at a point at an angle of incidence of smallest to largest. Note that total internal reflection
60° enters a glass sphere of  = 3 and it is reflected does occur on the bottom surface of medium 2.
and refracted at the farther surface of the sphere. n1
The angle between reflected and refracted rays at n2
this surface is
(A) 50° (B) 90° n3
(C) 60° (D) 40°
(A) n1 < n2 < n3 (B) n2 < n1 < n3
(C) n1 < n3 < n2 (D) n3 < n1 < n2
25. A ray of light passes through a plane glass slab of
thickness t and refractive index  = 1.5. The angle 30. The critical angle of light going from medium A to
between incident ray and emergent ray will be medium B is . The speed of light in medium A is v.
(A) 0° (B) 30° The speed of light in medium B is :

(C) 45° (D) 60° v

(A) (B) v sin 
sin 
(C) v cot  (D) v tan 
26. A ray of light is incident on one face of a transparent
slab of thickness 15 cm. The angle of incidence is
31. Two transparent media A and B are separated by a
60°. If the lateral displacement of the ray on
plane boundary. The speed of light in medium A is
emerging from the parallel plane is 5 3 cm, the 2.0 × 108 m s–1 and in medium B is 2.5 × 108 ms–1.
refractive index of the material of the slab is The critical angle for which a ray of light going from
(A) 1.414 (B) 1.532 A to B is totally internally reflected is

(C) 1.732 (D) none –1  1  –1  2 

(A) sin   (B) sin  
2  5

Section G - Critical Angle and Total Internal –1  4  –1  1 

(C) sin   (D) sin  
Reflection (T.I.R.)  5  3

27. For two given statements : 32. A light ray is incident on a transparent sphere of
I. Critical angle is greater for violet light than for index = 2 , at an angle of incidence = 45°. What
red light. is the deviation of a tiny fraction of the ray, which
II. Diamonds shine in the dark. enters the sphere, undergoes two internal reflections,
(A) I true, II false (B) I false, II true and then refracts out into air?
(C) both true (D) both false (A) 270° (B) 240°
(C) 120° (D) 180°

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.67

Section H - Prism 37. A certain prism is found to produce a minimum

deviation of 38°. It produces a deviation of 44° when
33. A prism having refractive index 2 and refracting the angle of incidence is either 42° or 62°. What is
angle 30°, has one of the refracting surface polished. the angle of incidence when it is undergoing minimum
A beam of light incident on the other refracting surface deviation?
will retrace its path if the angle of incidence is : (A) 45° (B) 49°
(C) 40° (D) 55°
(A) 0° (B) 30°
(C) 45° (D) 60°
38. A beam of monochromatic light is incident at i =
50° on one face of an equilateral prism, the angle of
34. A triangular prism of glass is shown in figure. A ray emergence is 40°, then the angle of minimum
incident normally on one face is totally reflected. If deviation is :
 is 45°, the index of refraction of glass is : (A) 30° (B) < 30°
(C)  30° (D)  30°
I
Section I - Dispersion of Light
 39. The dispersion of light in a medium implies that:
O
(A) lights of different wavelengths travels with
different speeds in the medium
(B) lights of different frequencies travel with different
(A) Less than 2 (B) Equal to 2 speeds in the medium
(C) Greater than (D) None of the above. (C) the refractive index of medium is different for
2
different wavelengths
(D) all of the above.
35. An equilateral prism deviates a ray through 23º for
two angles of incidence differing by 23º. Find  of 40. Critical angle of light passing from glass to air is
the prism ? minimum for
(A) red (B) green
33 43
(A) (B) (C) yellow (D) violet
5 3

43 62 41. A medium has n v = 1.56, n r = 1.44. Then its

(C) (D) dispersive power is :
5 2
3 6
(A) (B)
50 25
36. A ray of light is incident at angle i on a surface of a
prism of small angle A & emerges normally from (C) 0.03 (D) none
the opposite surface. If the refractive index of the
material of the prism is , the angle of incidence i is 42. Indicate the correct statement in the following
nearly equal to : (A) The dispersive power depends upon the angle
of prism
A A (B) The angular dispersion depends upon the angle
(A) (B)
 (2 ) of the prism
(C) The angular dispersion does not depend upon
A the dispersive power
(C) A (D) 
2
(D) The dispersive power in vacuum is one

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.68 Theory and Exercise Book

Section J - Refraction from a Spherical 46. A planoconcave lens is placed on a paper on which
Surface a flower is drawn. How far above its actual position
does the flower
43. The image for the converging beam after refraction Radius of
through the curved surface is formed at : appear to be ? curvature = 20 cm
(A) 10 cm air 3

(B) 15 cm t=20cm 2
n=3/2 n=1
(C) 50 cm
O
(D) none Paper
P x

30
R=20cm 47. A fish is near the centre of a spherical water filled
fish bowl. A child stands in air at a distance 2 R (R
40 is radius of curvature of the sphere) from the centre
(A) x = 40 cm (B) x = cm
3 of the bowl. At what distance from the centre would
the child's nose appear to the fish situated at the
40 180
(C) x = – cm (D) x = cm centre (R.I. of water = 4/3)
3 7
(A) 4R (B) 2R
(C) 3R (D) R
44. A narrow parallel beam of light is incident on a
transparent sphere of refractive index ‘n’. If the beam
48. A concave spherical surface of radius of curvature
finally gets focussed at a point situated at a distance
10 cm separates two medium x & y of refractive
= 2 × (radius of sphere) from the centre of the
index 4/3 & 3/2 respectively. If the object is placed
sphere, then find n?
along principal axis in medium X then
(A) 4/3 (B) 3/2
(A) image is always real
(C) 5/4 (D) 5/3
(B) image is real if the object
distance is greater than 90cm
45 An extended object of size 2 cm is placed at a distance
of 10 cm in air (n = 1) from pole, on the principal (C) image is always virtual
axis of a spherical curved surface. The medium on (D) image is virtual if the object distance is less than
the other side of refracting surface has refractive 90 cm
index n = 2. Find the position, nature and size of
image formed after single refraction through the Section K - Lens Maker formula and
curved surface. Magnification, Image formation
by convex and concave lens,
Combination of lens, Cutting of
n=1
2cm

n=2
lens
49. A thin lens of focal length f and its aperture diameter
10cm
d, forms a real image of intensity I. Now the central
ROC = 20cm d
part of the aperture upto diameter ( ) is blocked
2
(A) 30 cm from pole in the medium of refractive
index 1, virtual, erect and 4 cm in size. by an opaque paper. The focal length and image
(B) 40 cm from pole in the medium of refractive intensity would change to
index 1, virtual, erect and 4 cm in size. f I I
(C) 40 cm from pole in the medium of refractive (A) , (B) f ,
2 2 4
index 1, real, inverted and 4 cm in size.
(D)30 cm from pole in the medium of refractive 3f I 3I
(C) , (D) f,
index 1, virtual, erect and 6 cm in size. 4 2 4

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.69

50. When the object is at distances u1 and u2 the images 56. Two symmetric double convex lenses A and B have
formed by the same lens are real and virtual same focal length, but the radii of curvature differ
respectively and of the same size. Then focal length so that RA = 0.9 RB. If nA = 1.63, find nB.
of the lens is ; (A) 1.7 (B) 1.6
1 1 (C) 1.5 (D) 4/3
(A) u1u 2 (B) (u1  u 2 )
2 2
Section L - Power of lens and Mirror,
(C) u1 u 2 (D) 2(u1  u 2 )
Silverging of lens, Displacement
Method
51. Which of the following cannot form real image of a
real object ? 57. A lens of power + 2.0 D is placed in contact with
another lens of power – 1.0 D. The combination
(A) concave mirror (B) convex mirror
will behave like
(C) both mirror (D) none of these
(A) a converging lens of focal length 100 cm

52. A double convex lens has focal length 50 cm. The (B) a diverging lens of focal length 100 cm
radius of curvature of one of the surfaces is double (C) a converging lens of focal length 50 cm
of the other. Find the radii, if the refractive index of (D) a diverging lens of focal length 50 cm.
the material of the lens is 2.
(A) 150 cm, 75 cm (B) 125 cm, 150 cm 58. In the adjoining ray-diagram are given the
(C) 75 cm, 150 cm (D) 25 cm, 75 cm positions of an object O, image I and two lenses L1
and L2. The focal length of L1 is also given. Find
53. A thin symmetrical double convex the focal length of the lens L2.
lens of power P is cut into three A
part, as shown in the figure. Power
B
of A is :
C
P
(A) 2 P (B)
2
L1 L2
P
(C) (D) P
3 (A) 30 cm (B) – 30 cm
(C) –15 cm (D) None of these
54. A plano convex lens has a curved surface of radius
100 cm. If  = 1.5, then the focal length of the lens is
59. A thin equi-convex
(A) 50 cm (B) 100 cm  = 5/3
lens having radius
(C) 200 cm (D) 500 cm of curvature 10 cm is  = 5/4  = 3/2

placed as shown in
55. A biconvex lens has a focal
figure. Calculate focal length of the lens,
length of 10 cm. It is cut in half
if parallel rays are incident as shown.
and two pieces are placed as
shown. The focal length of the 120 160
(A) cm (B) cm
final combination is 7 7

(A) 10 (B) 20 180

(C) cm (D) None
(C) 40 (D) Not a lens 7

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.70 Theory and Exercise Book

60. A convex lens of focal length 10 cm is placed 30 65. A compound microscope has a magnification power
cm in front of a second conves lens also of the of 100 when the image is formed at infinity. the
same focal length. A plane mirror is placed after objective has a focal length of 0.5 cm and the tube
the two lenses. Where should a point object be
length is 6.5 cm. Find the focal length of eyepiece.
placed in front of the first lens so that it images on
to itself ? (A) 1 cm (B) 2 cm
(A) 20 cm (B) 15 cm (C) 20 cm (D) 40 cm
(C) 30 cm (D) 25 cm

61. A concave mirror of focal length 30 cm is placed on 66. A telescope has an objective of focal length
the flat horizontal surface with its concave side up. 30 cm and an eyepiece of focal length 3.0 cm. It is
Water with refractive index 1.33 is poured into the focussed on an object of distance 2.0 meter. For
lens. Where should an object be placed if its image is seeing with relaxed eye, calculate the separation
to be captured on a screen with a magnification of between the objective and the eyepiece.
2?
(A) 33 cm (B) 27 cm
(A) 44.25 cm (B) 40.60 cm
(C) 33.75 cm (D) 38.50 cm (C) 38.3 cm (D) None of these

62. A convex lens is cut in half along its principal axis 67. A liquid of refractive index 1.6 is contained in the
and the two halves are separated by a distance of cavity of a glass specimen of refractive index 1.5 as
12 cm. An object is placed 6 cm in front of the lens shown in figure. If each of the curved surfaces has
as shown in Figure. Two sharp images are formed a radius of curvature of 0.20 m, the arrangement
on the screen placed 80 cm from the object. What behaves as a
is the focal length of the lens ?
(A) 12.50 cm
(B) 23.45 cm Glass

(C) 17.30 cm
(D) 19.55 cm
Liquid

63. A telephoto combination consists of convex lens of

focal length 30 cm and a concave lens of focal length (A) converging lens of focal length 0.25 m
15 cm, the separation between two lens is 27.5 cm. (B) diverging lens of focal length 0.25 m
Where should be the photographic plate placed in order (C) diverging lens of focal length 0.17 m
to photograph an object 10 m in front of the first lens? (D) converging lens of focal length 0.72 m
(A) 5 cm (B) 3 cm
(C) 4 cm (D) 6 cm 68. The focal lengths of the objective and
the eyepiece of a compound microscope are 2.0 cm
64. The source is placed 30 cm from a convex lens which and 3.0 cm, respectively. The distance between the
has a focal length of 20 cm. The source is initially objective and the eyepiece is 15.0 cm,. The final
located on the axis of the lens. The lens is then cut image formed by the eyepiece is at infiinity. The
into two halves in a plane along the principal axis. two lenses are thin. The distance, in cm, of the object
The two halves are separated by a distance of 4 and the image produced by the objective, measured
mm. What will be the locations of the image of the from the objective lens, are respectively
source? (A) 2.4 and 12.0 (B) 2.4 and 15.0
(A) 7 cm (B) 3 cm (C) 2.0 and 12.0 (D) 2.0 and 3.0
(C) 4 cm (D) 6 cm

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.71

69. An eye specialist prescribes spectacles having 72. In a simple microscope, if the final image is located
combination of convex lens of focal length 40 cm in at infinity then its magnifying power-
contact with a concave lens of focal length 25 cm. (A) 25/F (B) 25/D
The power of this lens combination in diopters is
(C) F/25 (D) (1+ 25/F)
(A) +1.5 (B) –1.5
(C) +6.67 (D) –6.67
73. An astronomical telescope has a magnifying power
10. The focal length of the eye piece is 20 cm. the
Section M - Chromatic Aberration and focal length of the objective is -
Achromatism, Optical (A) 2 cm (B) 200 cm
Instrument + Eye + Luminous
(C) (1/2) cm (D) (1/200) cm
Intensity

70. A real image of a distant object is formed by a 74. If F0 and Fe are the focal lengths of the objective
planoconvex lens on its principal axis. Spherical and eye-piece respectively for a Galilean telescope,
aberration its magnifying power is about

(A) is absent (A) F0 + Fe (B) F0 × Fe

(B) is smaller if the curved surface of the lens faces 1

(C) F0/Fe (D) F + Fe
the object 2 0
(C) is smaller if the plane surface of the lens faces
the object
75. A myopic person can not see objects lying beyond 2
(D) is the same whichever side of the lens faces the m. The focal length and power of the lens required
object. to remove this defect will be
(A) 1 m & 0.5 D (B) – 2m & – 0.5 D
71. The focal length of the objective of a microscope is- (C) 0.5 m & 0.5 D (D) – 0.5 m & 0.5 D
(A) Greater than the focal length of eye piece
(B) Lesser than the focal length of the eye piece
(C) Equal to the focal length of the eye piece
(D) Any of (A) (B) and (C)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.72 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 2 (Level-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

Section A - Plane Mirror 6. A light ray is incident on a

1. A unnumbered wall clock shows time 04 : 25 : 37, plane mirror, which after

where 1st term represents hours, 2nd represents getting reflected strikes
minutes & the last term represents seconds, What
another plane mirror, as
time will its image in a plane mirror show.
shown in figure. The angle 60°
(A) 08 : 35 : 23 (B) 07 : 35 : 23
between the two mirrors is
(C) 07 : 34 : 23 (D) None of these
60°. Find the angle ''
shown in figure.
2. There are two plane mirror with reflecting surface
(A) 60° (B) 30°
facing each other. Both the mirrors are moving with
speed v away from each other. A point object is (C) 45° (D) 90°
placed between the mirrors. The velocity of the image
from due to n-th reflection will be
7. A plane mirror of circular shape with radius
(A) nv (B) 2nV
r = 20 cm is fixed to the ceiling. A bulb is to be
(C) 3nv (D) 4nv placed on the axis of the mirror. A circular area of
radius R = 1 m on the floor is to be illuminated after
3. Two plane mirrors are placed parallel to each other reflection of light from the mirror. The height of the
at a distance L apart. A point object O is placed room is 3m. What is maximum distance from the
between them, at a distance L/3 from one mirror. center of the mirror and the bulb so that the required
Both mirrors form multiple images. The distance area is illuminated ?
between any two images cannot be
(A) 75 cm (B) 60 cm
(A) 3L/2 (B) 2L/3
(C) 65 cm (D) 90 cm
(C) 2L (D) None

4. A person's eye is at a height of 1.5 m. He stands in 8. A light ray I is incident on a plane mirror M. The
front of a 0.3m long plane mirror which is 0.8m mirror is rotated in the direction as shown in the
above the ground. The length of the image he sees figure by an arrow at frequency 9/ rev/sec. The
of himself is : light reflected the mirror is received on the wall W
(A) 1.5 m (B) 1.0 m at a distance 10m from the axis of rotation. When
(C) 0.8 m (D) 0.6 m the angle of incidence becomes 37° find the speed
of the spot (a point) on the wall?

5. A boy of height 1.5 m with his eye level at 1.4 m

stands before a plane mirror of length 0.75 m fixed
on the wall. The height of the lower edge of the
mirror above the floor is 0.8 m. Then :
(A) the boy will see his full image
(B) the boy connot see his hair
(C) the boy cannot see his feet (A) 960 m/s (B) 840 m/s
(D) the boy cannot see neither his hair nor his feet.
(C) 1000 m/s (D) 900 m/s

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.73

9. A plane mirror is moving with velocity 4iˆ  5jˆ  8kˆ . (A) 30° (B) 45°
(C) 60° (D) 75°
A point object in front of the mirror moves with a
velocity 3iˆ  4ˆj  5kˆ . Here k̂ is along the normal 14. An object is placed at a distance u from a concave
to the plane mirror and facing towards the object. mirror and its real image is received on a screen
The velocity of the image is placed at a distance of v from the mirror. If f is the
focal length of the mirror, then the graph between
(A) –3iˆ – 4ˆj  5kˆ (B) 3iˆ  4ˆj  11kˆ
1/v versus 1/u is
(C) –3iˆ – 4ˆj  11kˆ (D) 7iˆ  9ˆj  11kˆ 1 1
v v
Section B, C, D, E - Mirror formula and
Magnification, Veloci ty in (A) (B)
Spherical Mirror, Cutting of 1 1
Mirrors, Combination of Mirrors, u u
Intensity of light
1 1
10. A candle flame of 3 cm is placed at 300 cm from a v v
wall. A concave mirror is kept at distance x from the
wall in such a way that image of the flame on the
(C) (D)
wall is 9 cm. Then x is - 1
1
(A) 339 cm (B) 900 cm u u
(C) 450 cm (D) 423 cm
15. A rod of length 30 cm lies along the principal axis of
11. A convex mirror has a focal length f. An a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm in such a
object of height h is placed in front of it. If an erect way that its end closer to the pole is 20 cm away
image of height h/n is formed. The distance of the from the mirror. The length of the image is
object from the mirror is : (A) 10 cm (B) 15 cm
(A) nf (B) f/n (C) 2.5 cm (D) 5 cm
(C) (n + 1) f (D) (n – 1) f
Section F - Snell's Law, Apparent depth
12. The distance of an object from a spherical mirror is and Normal shift, Refraction
equal to focal length of the mirror. Then the image : through a Glass slab, Lateral
shift
(A) must be at infinity (B) may be at infinity
(C) may be at the focus (D) none 16. A mark at the bottom of a beaker containing liquid
appears to rise by 0.1m. The depth of the liquid is
13. The circular boundary of the concave mirror 1m. the refractive index of liquid is :
subtends a cone of half angle  at its centre of (A) 1.33 (B) 9/10
curvature. The minimum value of  for which ray (C) 10/9 (D) 1.5
incident on this mirror parallel to the principle axis
suffers reflection more than one is 17. A bird is flying 3 m above the surface of water. If
the bird is diving vertically down with speed = 6 m/
s, his apparent velocity as seen by a stationary fish
 underwater is
 C
(A) 8 m/s (B) 6 m/s
(C) 12 m/s (D) 4 m/s

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.74 Theory and Exercise Book

Section G - Critical Angle and Total Internal (A) It is impossible to predict the behavior of the
Reflection (T.I.R.) light ray on the basis of the information supplied
(B) The sine of the angle of refraction of the
18. Which of the following statements is/are emergent ray will less than 0.8
correct about the refraction of light from a plane
(C) The ray will be internally reflected
surface when light ray is incident in denser medium.
(D) The sine of the angle of refraction of the
[C is critical angle]
emergent ray will be greater than 0.8.
(A) The maximum angle of deviation during

refraction is  C , it will be at angle of incidence Section H - Prism
2
is greater than C.
3
(B) The maximum angle of deviation for all angle of 22. A prism has a refractive index and refracting
2
incidences is  – 2C, when angle of incidence is
angle 90°. Find the minimum deviation produced
slightly less than C.
by prism.
(C) If angle of incidence is less than C then deviation
(A) 40° (B) 45°
increases if angle of incidence is also decreased.
(C) 30° (D) 49°
(D) If angle of incidence is greater than C then angle
of deviation decreases if angle of incidence is
increased. 23. A prism is made up of material of refractive index

19. Light passes from air into flint glass with index of 3 . The angle of prism is A. If the angle of
refraction n. What angle of incidence must the light minimum deviation is equal to the angle of the prism,
have so that the component of its velocity then the value of A is :
perpendicular to the interface remains same in both (A) 30° (B) 45°
medium? (C) 60° (D) 75°
1
(A) tan–1  n  (B) sin–1(1/n) 24. A ray of monochromatic light is incident on one
refracting face of a prism of angle 75°. It passes
through the prism and is incident on the other face
1 at the critical angle. If the refractive index of the
(C) cos–1   (D) tan–1 n
n material of the prism is 2, the angle of incidence
on the first face of the prism is
(A) 30° (B) 45°
20. The refractive index of water is 4/3 and that of glass
(C) 60° (D) 0°
is 5/3. Then the critical angle for a ray of light
entering water from glass will be:
(A) sin-1(4/5) (B) sin-1(5/4) Section I - Dispersion of Light
(C) sin-1(20/9) (D) sin-1(9/20) 25. A thin prism P1 with angle 4° made of glass of
refractive index 1.54 is combined with another thin
prism P2 made of glass of refractive index 1.72 to
21. A ray of light in a liquid of refractive index 1.4,
approaches the boundary surface between the liquid produce dispersion without deviation. The angle of
the prism P2 is :
and air at an angle of incidence whose sine is 0.8.
Which of the following statements is correct about (A) 3° (B) 2.6°
the behaviour of the light (C) 4° (D) 5.33°

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.75

26. Light of wavelength 4000 Å is incident at small angle 29. There is a small air bubble inside a glass sphere ( = 1.5)
on a prism of apex angle 4°. The prism has nv = 1.5 of radius 5 cm. The bubble is 7.5 cm below the surface
& nr = 1.48. The angle of dispersion produced by
4
the prism in this light is : of the glass. The sphere is placed inside water ( = )
3
(A) 0.2° (B) 0.08° such that the top surface of glass is 10 cm below the
(C) 0.192° (D) none surface of water. The bubble is viewed normally from
air. Find the apparent depth on the bubble.

27. A beam of light consisting of red, green and blue

and is incident on a right angled prism. The refractive Observer

index of the material of the prism for the above red,

green and blue wavelengths are 1.39, 1.44 and 1.47 10cm
respectively. The prism will :
glass
C

water O

(A) 15 cm below the surface of water

45° (B) 10.5 cm below the surface of water
(C) 16.66 cm below the surface of water
(A) separate part of the red colors from the green (D) 13.5 cm below the surface of water
and blue colors.
(B) separate part of the blue colors from red and 30. A uniform, horizontal beam of light is incident upon
green colors. a quarter cylinder of radius R = 5 cm, and has a
(C) separate all the three colors from the other two refractive index 2 / 3 . A patch on the table for a
colors. distance ‘x’ from the cylinder is unilluminated, find
(D) not separate even partially any colour from the the value of ‘x’ ?
other two colors.

Section J - Refraction from a Spherical

Surface

28. A spherical surface of radius of curvature (A) 7.2 cm (B) 12.5 cm

10 cm separates two media X and Y of refractive (C) 5 cm (D) 10 cm
indices 3/2 and 4/3 respectively. Centre of the
spherical surface lies in denser medium. An object 31. A curved surface of radius R separates two medium of
is placed in medium X. For image to be real, the refractive indices 1 and 2 as shown in figures A and B
object distance must be
(A) greater than 90 cm
(B) less than 90 cm
(C) greater than 80 cm
(D) less than 80 cm

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.76 Theory and Exercise Book

35. An object is placed at a distance of 15 cm from a

convex lens of focal length 10 cm. On the other side
of the lens, a convex mirror is placed at its focus
such that the image formed by the combination
coincides with the object itself. The focal length of
the convex mirror is
Choose the correct statement(s) related to the real (A) 20 cm (B) 10 cm
image formed by the object O placed at a distance
(C) 15 cm (D) 30 cm
x, as shown in figure A
(A) Real image is always formed irrespective of the
36. An object is placed at a distance of 10 cm from a
position of object if 2>1
co-axial combination of two lenses A and B in
(B) Real image is formed only when x > R
contact. The combination forms a real image three
(C) Real image is formed due to the convex nature times the size of the object. If lens B is concave
of the interface irrespective of 1 and 2 with a focal length of 30 cm, what is the nature and
(D) None of these focal length of lens A ?
(A) Convex, 12 cm (B) Concave, 12 cm
Section K - Lens Maker formula and (C) Convex, 6 cm (D) Convex, 18 cm
Magnification, Image formation
by convex and concave lens,
Section L - Power of lens and Mirror,
Combination of lens, Cutting of
Silverging of lens, Displacement
lens
Method
32. When a lens of power P (in air) made of material of
refractive index  is immersed in liquid of refractive 37. A luminous object and a screen are at a fixed distance
index 0. Then the power of lens is : D apart. A converging lens of focal length f is placed
between the object and screen. A real image of the
 –1  – 0 object in formed on the screen for two lens positions
(A)  –  P (B) P
0  –1 if they are separated by a distance d equal to

 – 0 P (A) D(D  4f ) (B) D(D  4f )

(C)  – 1 .  (D) None of these
0
(C) 2D(D  4f ) (D) D 2  4f

33. An object is placed at 10 cm from a lens and real

38. In a compound microscope, the intermediate image is
image is formed with magnification of 0.5. Then
(A) virtual, erect, and magnified
the lens is :
(B) real, erect, and magnified
(A) concave with focal lenth of 10/3 cm
(C) real, inverted, and magnified
(B) convex with focal length of 10/3 cm
(D) virtual, erect, and reduced
(C) concave with focal length of 10 cm
(D) convex with focal length of 10 cm
39. A telescope has an objective of focal length 50 cm
and eyepiece of focal length 5 cm. The least distance
34. A thin linear object of size 1 mm is kept along the
of distinct vision is 25 cm. The telescope is focused
principal axis of a convex lens of focal length 10
for distinct vision on a scale 200 cm away from the
cm. The object is at 15 cm from the lens. The length
objective. Calculate the magnification produced.
of the image is :
(A) -2 (B) 3
(A) 1 mm (B) 4 mm
(C) 2 (D) -4
(C) 2 mm (D) 8 mm

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.77

Section M - Chromatic Aberration and 43. A telescope consisting of objective of focal length
Achromatism, Optical 60cm and a single lens eye piece of focal length
Instrument + Eye + Luminous 5cm is focussed at a distant object in such a way
Intensity that parallel rays emerge from the eye piece. If the
object subtends an angle of 2° at the objective, then
40. It is desired to make an achromatic combination of angular width of image will be.
two lenses (L1 & L2) made of materials having (A) 10° (B) 24°
dispersive powers  1 and 2 (<1 ). If the
(C) 50° (D) 1/60
combination of lenses is converging then
(A) L1 is converging (B) L2 is converging
44. A telescope has an objective lens of 10 cm. diameter and
(C) Power of L1 is greater than the power of L2
is situated at a distance of one kilometer from two objects.
(D) none of these The minimum distance between these two objects, which
can be resolved by the telescope, when the mean
41. When length of a microscope tube increases its wavelength of light is 5000 Å, is of the order of :–
magnifying power - (A) 5 m. (B) 5 mm.
(A) Decreases (B) Increase (C) 5 cm. (D) 0.5 m.
(C) Does not change (D)May increaseor decrease
45. Refractive index of violet,yellow and Red colour of
42. The magnifying power of an astronomical telescope light for a material of lens are 1.66, 1.64 & 1.62
can be increased, if we- respectively. If mean focal length of lens is 10cm
(A) Increase the focal length of the objective Then chromatic abberation between the colour of
violet and red will be
(B) Increase of the focal length of the eye piece
(A) 0.625cm (B) 0.125
(C) Decreases the focal length of the objective
(C) .02cm (D) 0cm
(D) Decrease the focal length of the objective and at
the same time increase the focal length of the eye piece.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.78 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

A
Section A - Plane Mirror

40 cm
(A) 160 cm
(B) 320 cm B
1. A man of height 170 cm wants to see his complete

40 cm
(C) 360 cm
image in a plane mirror (while standing). His eyes
S A
are at a height of 160 cm from the ground. (D) 280 cm
20cm 40cm
(A) Minimum length of the mirror = 80 cm
(B) Minimum length of the mirror = 85 cm Section B, C, D, E - Mirror formula and
(C) Bottom of the mirror should be at a height Magnification, Veloci ty in
80 cm or less Spherical Mirror, Cutting of
Mirrors, Combination of Mirrors,
(D) Bottom of the mirror should be at a height
Intensity of light
85 cm

4. The image (of a real object) formed by a concave

2. A flat mirror M is arranged parallel to a wall W at a mirror is twice the size of the object. The focal length
distance l from it. The light produced by a point of the mirror is 20 cm. The distance of the object
source S kept on the wall is reflected by the mirror from the mirror is (are)
and produces a light spot on the wall. The mirror
(A) 10 cm (B) 30 cm
moves with velocity v towards the wall.
(C) 25 cm (D) 15 cm

5. In the figure shown consider the first reflection at

the plane mirror and second at the convex mirror.
AB is object.

velocity
(A) The spot of light will move with the speed v on
the wall A B C

(B) The spot of light will not move on the wall 120cm
10cm 10cm
(C) As the mirror comes closer the spot of light will 50cm
become larger and shift away from the wall with
speed larger then v
(A) the second image is real, inverted of 1/5th
(D) The size of the light on the wall remains the
magnification
same
(B) the second image is virtual and erect with
magnification 1/5
3. In figure shown AB is a plane mirror of length 40
cm placed at a height 40cm from ground. There is a (C) the second image moves towards the convex
light source S at a point on the ground. Which of mirror.
the following height(s) of a man (eye height) can (D) the second image moves away from the convex
see the image of the source if he is standing at a mirror.
point A on ground shown in figure.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.79

6. A boy 2 m tall stands 40 cm in front of a mirror. He (A) real, and will remain at C
sees an erect image, 1 m high. Which of the (B) real, and located at a point between C
following is/are correct about the mirror : and 
(A) Concave (B) Convex (C) virtual, and located at a point between C and O
(C) f = 40 cm (D) f = 50 cm (D) real, and located at a point between C
and O

7. A luminous point object is moving along the principal

axis of a concave mirror of focal length 12 cm Section G - Critical Angle and Total
towards it. When its distance from the mirror is 20 Internal Reflection (T.I.R.)
cm its velocity is 4 cm/s. Which of the following is
wrong about the velocity of the image in cm/s at 10. In the diagram shown, a ray of light is incident on
that instant is the interface between 1 and 2 at angle slightly greater
than critical angle. The light surfers total internal
(A) 6, towards the mirror
reflection at this interface. After that the light ray
(B) 6, away from the mirror falls at the interface of 1 and 3, and again it suffers
(C) 9, away from the mirror total internal reflection. Which of the following
relations should hold true?
(D) 9, towards the mirror.

Section F - Snell's Law, Apparent depth

and Normal shift, Refraction
through a Glass slab, Lateral
shift k

8. A beam of light is converging towards a point. A

plane parallel plate of glass of thickness t, refractive
index  is introduced in the path of the beam. The (A) 1 > 2 < 3 (B) 12 –  22   23
convergent point is shifted by (assume near normal
(C) 12 – 32   22 (D) 12   22  23
incidence) :


 1  11. The figure shows ray incident at an angle

(A) t  1 –   O i = /3. If the plot drawn shown the variation of
 
|r – i| versus 1/2 = k, (r = angle of refraction)

 1  t
(B) t  1   
 
|r – i|
(C) nearer (D) away i

k
k1 k2
9. A concave mirror is placed on a horizontal table,
with its axis directed vertically upwards. Let O be 2
the pole of the mirror and C its centre of curvature. (A) the value of k1 is
3
A point object is placed at C. Its has a real image,
also located at C (a condition called auto-collimation). (B) the value of 1 = /6
If the mirror is now filled with water, then choose (C) the value of 2 = /3
the wrong statements about image : (D) the value of k2 is 1

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.80 Theory and Exercise Book

Section H - Prism Section I - Dispersion of Light

12. A ray of light is incident normally on one face of 15. By properly combining two prisms made of different
30° – 60° – 90° prism of refractive index materials, it is possible to
5/3 immersed in water of refractive index 4/3 as (A) have dispersion without average deviation
shown in figure.
(B) have deviation without dispersion
(C) have both dispersion and average deviation
(D) have neither dispersion nor average deviation

Section J - Refraction from a Spherical

Surface

16. In the figure shown a point object O is placed in air

(A) The exit angle 2 of the ray is sin–1(5/8)
on the principal axis. The radius of curvature of the
(B) The exit angle 2 of the ray is sin–1( 5 / 4 3 ) spherical is 60 cm. If is the final image formed after
all the refractions and reflections.
(C) Total internal reflection at point P ceases if the
refractive index of water is increased to 5/ 2 3 by
dissolving some substance.
(D) Total internal reflection at point P ceases if the
refractive index of water is increased to 5/6 by
dissolving some substance.

(A) If d1 = 120 cm, then the ‘If’ is formed on ‘O’

13. For refraction through a small angled prism, the angle
for any value of d2.
of deviation :
(B) If d1 = 240 cm, then the ‘If’ is formed on ‘O’
(A) increases with the increase in R.I. of prism.
only if d2 = 360 cm.
(B) will decrease with the increase in R.I. of prism.
(C) If d1 = 240 cm, then the ‘If’ is formed on ‘O’
(C) is directly proportional to the angle of prism. for all value of d2.
(D) will be 2D for a ray of R.I. = 2.4 if it is D for a (D) If d1 = 240 cm, then the ‘If’ cannot be formed
ray of R.I = 1.2 on ‘O’.

14. For the refraction of light through a prism 17. Two refracting media are separated by a spherical
(A) For every angle of deviation there are two angles interface as shown in the figure. PP is the principal
of incidence. axis, 1,and 2 are the refractive indices of medium
(B) The light travelling inside an equilateral prism is of incidence and medium of refraction respectively.
necessarily parallel to the base when prism is set for Then:
minimum deviation.
(C) There are two angles of incidence for maximum
deviation.
P P
(D) Angle of minimum deviation will increase if
refractive index of prism is increased keeping the
outside medium unchanged if p>s.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.81

(A) if 2 > 1, then there cannot be a real image of 20. A convex lens forms an image of an object on screen.
real object. The height of the image is 9 cm. The lens is now
(B) if 2 > 1, then there cannot be a real image of displaced until an image is again obtained on the
virtual object. screen. The height of this image is 4 cm. The distance
(C) if 1 > 2, then there cannot be a virtual image between the object and the screen is 90 cm.
of virtual object. (A) The distance between the two positions of the
lens is 30 cm.
(D) if 1 > 2, then there cannot be a real image of
(B) The distance of the object from the lens is its
real object.
first position is 36cm.
(C) The height of the object is 6cm.
Section K - Lens Maker formula and (D) The focal length of the lens is 21.6 cm.
Magnification, Image formation
by convex and concave lens,
Section L - Power of lens and Mirror,
Combination of lens, Cutting of
Silverging of lens, Displacement
lens
Method
18. The radius of curvature of the left & right surface 21 In displacement method, the distance between
of the concave lens are 10 cm & 15 cm respectively. object and screen is 96cm. The ratio of length of
The radius of curvature of the mirror is 15 cm. two images formed by a converging lens placed
between them is 4.
air (A) Ratio of the length of object to the length of
water
(n=4/3)
shorter image is 2.
(B) Distance between the two positions of the lens
Glass
(n = 3/2) is 32 cm.

64
(A) equivalent focal length of the combination is (C) Focal length of the lens is cm .
3
–18 cm
(D) When the shorter image is formed on screen,
(B) equivalent focal length of the combination is
distance of the lens from the screen is 32 cm.
+36 cm
(C) the system behaves like a concave mirror
22. A pin is placed 10 cm in front of a convex lens of
(D) the system behaves like a convex mirror. focal length 20 cm, made of a material having
refractive index 1.5. The surface of the lens farther
19. If a symmetrical biconcave thin lens is cut into two away from the pin is silvered and has a radius of
identical halves. They are placed in different ways curvature 22 cm. Choose the wrong statement(s)
as shown : about the position and nature of the final image.

Object

Fig(i) Fig(ii) Fig(iii)

(A) three images will be formed in case (i)

(A) image will be 2.1 cm behind of silvered lens and real.
(B) two images will be formed in the case (i)
(B) image will be 11 cm infront of silvered lens and real.
(C) the ratio of focal lengths in (ii) & (iii) is 1
(C) image will be 1.7 cm infront of silvered lens and real.
(D) the ratio of focal lengths (in) (ii) & (iii) is 2 (D) image will be 1.4 cm behind of silvered lens and real.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.82 Theory and Exercise Book

23. An equiconvex lens, f1 = 10 cm, is placed 40 cm in 25. A thin, symmetric double convex lens of power P is
front of a concave mirror, f2 = 7.50 cm, as shown in cut into three parts A, B, and C as shown in Figure.
figure. An object 2 cm high is placed 20 cm to the The power of
left of the lens. (A) A is P
(B) A is 2P
(C) B is P/2
(D) C is P/4

26. In an astronomical telescope, the distance between

the objective and the eyepiece is 36 cm and the
final image is formed at infinity with a magnification
5. The focal length f0 of the objective and the focal
length fe of the eyepiece are
Choose the correct statement(s) about the position (A) f0 = 45 cm and fe = –9 cm
of the final image formed when leftward travelling (B) f0 = 50 cm and fe = 10 cm
rays once again pass through the lens. (C) f0 = 7.2 cm and fe = 5 cm
(A) Final image real inverted and lies 16.5 cm to left (D) f0 = 30 cm and fe = 6 cm
of lens.
(B) Final image real inverted and lies 15.6 cm to left Section M - Chromatic Aberration and
of lens. Achromatism, Optical
Instrument + Eye + Luminous
(C) overall magnification = –0.333 Intensity
(D) overall magnification = –0.467
27. A planet is observed by an astronomical refracting
telescope having an objective of focal length 16 m
24. A biconvex lens f1 = 20 cm, is placed 5 cm in front and an eyepiece of focal length 2 cm. Then,
of a convex mirror, f2 = 15 cm. An object of length (A) the distance between the objective and the
2 cm is placed at a distance 10 cm from the lens. eyepiece is 16.02 m.
(B) the angular magnification of the planet
is – 800
(C) the image of the planet is inverted
(D) the objective is larger than the eyepiece
O
28. Which of the following statements is/are correct :
(A) The inability of a lens to bring the light of
different colours to focus at a single point is called
Choose the correct statement(s) about the location
chromatic aberration.
and nature of the final image after the leftward
(B) The difference between focal lengths of the lens
travelling rays once again pass through the lens. for red and violet light i.e. fr–fv gives the measure of
(A) 51.1 cm right of lens, real, erect and magnified axial (or longitudinal) chromatic aberration.
Mathematically : fr–fv = × f
8 (C) The chromatic aberration in a lens is because of
(B) overall magnification =
3 the fact that it has different focal lengths for light of
different colours.
(C) 62.7 cm from lens, real, inverted and magnified
(D) Spectrometer is an optical instrument to obtain
(D) overall magnification = 3 and study the pure spectrum.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.83

Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced

Section A - Plane Mirror 6. Find the angle of deviation (both clockwise and
anticlockwise) suffered by a ray incident on a plane
1. A small plane mirror is rotating at constant frequency mirror, at an angle of incidence 30°.
of n rotations per second. With what linear velocity
(in ms-1) will a light spot move along a spherical
30°
screen of radius of curvature of R metres if the mirror
is at the centre of curvature of the screen? M

2. A point source of light S is placed at a distance L in

front of the centre of a plane mirror PQ of width d 7. Figure shows a plane mirror onto which a light ray
hung vertically on a wall as shown in Figure. A man is incident. If the incident light ray is turned by 10°
walks in front of the mirror along a line parallel to and the mirror by 20°, as shown, find the angle
the mirror at a distance 2L from it as shown. The turned by the reflected ray.
greatest distance over which he can see the image 10° Reflected ray
of the light source in the mirror is
30°

P 20°

L 8. An object is placed at (0, 0) and a plane mirror is

S
placed,inclined 30° with the x axis.
Q Man y axis
2L M

3. Two plane mirrors are inclined to each other at an 30°

angle 60°. If a ray of light incident on the first mirror Object (1, 0) x axis
is parallel to the second mirror, it is reflected from (0,0)

the second mirror. “Parallel to which mirror.” (a) Find the position of image.
(B) If the object starts moving with velocity 1 î m/s
4. Two mirrors are inclined at an angle  as shown in and the mirror is fixed find the velocity of image.
the figure. Light ray is incident parallel to one of the
mirrors. The ray will start retracing its path after 9. A point object is placed at (0, 0, 0) and a plane
third reflection if : mirror is placed parallel to YZ plane at x = 2. Find
the coordinate of image

10. A straight line joining the object point and image

 point is always perpendicular to the mirror, find
distance of 2nd image in II mirror from object.
3m

5. Images of an object placed between two plane mirrors

whose reflecting surfaces make an angle of 90° with
one another lie on a : I 10m II
1.84 Theory and Exercise Book

Section B, C, D, E - Mirror formula and 15. In the figure shown find the total magnification after
Magnification, Veloci ty in two successive reflections first on M1 & then on M2
Spherical Mirror, Cutting of f=10cm f=–20cm
Mirrors, Combination of Mirrors,
Intensity of light

11. A driver stops his car at a red light. The car is fitted M2 M1
with side view mirror of focal length 10 m. An 10cm 30cm
ambulance is approaching the car at a constant speed
of 16 ms-1. The speed of image of the ambulance,
as seen by the driver in the side view mirror, when 16. In the figure shown if the object ‘O’ moves towards
it is at distance of 50 m from the mirror will be the plane mirror, then the image I (which is formed
after successive reflections from M 1 & M 2
respectively)
12. In case of concave mirror, the minimum distance
between a real object and its real image is :

13. A rod AB of length 5 cm is placed in front of a O

concave mirror of focal length 10 cm as shown in M2 M1
figure. The length of the image of AB formed by
the mirror is
17. A convex lens has a radius of curvature of magnitude
20 cm. Describe the image formed of an object of
B A P
height 2 cm placed 30 cm from the lens ?
5 cm 15 cm

Section F - Snell's Law, Apparent depth

and Normal shift, Refraction
through a Glass slab, Lateral
14. A beaker contains water (=4/3) filled to a height of shift
32 cm. A concave mirror is fixed 6 cm above the
surface of water as shown in figure. An object is 18. A small source of light is 4m below the surface of a
placed at the bottom of the beaker and its image is liquid of refractive index 5/3. In order to cut off all
formed 14 cm below the surface of water. The focal the light coming out of liquid surface, minimum
length of the mirror is diameter of the disc placed on the surface of liquid is

19. A fish looking up through the water sees the outside

6cm
world contained in a circular horizon. If the refrac-
14cm
tive index of water is 4/3 and fish is 12 cm below
i
the surface, the radius of the circle in cm is

32cm
20. A light ray falling at an angle of 60° with the surface
of a clean slab of ice of thickness 1.00 m is refracted
into it at an angle of 15°. Calculate the time taken
by the light rays to cross the slab. Speed of light in
vacuum = 3 × 108 m/s.
Object

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.85

21. An observer in air (n = 1) sees the bottom of a 25. A long solid cylindrical glass rod of refractive index
beaker filled with water (n = 4/3) upto a height of 3/2 is immersed in a liquid of refractive index
40 cm. What will be the depth felt by this observer.
3 3 / 4 . The end of the rod are perpendicular to
observer the central axis of the rod. a light enters one end of
the rod at the central axis as shown in the figure.
Find the maximum value of angle  for which internal
40cm
reflection occurs inside the rod?

Section G - Critical Angle and Total

Internal Reflection (T.I.R.)
Section H - Prism
22. A cubical block of glass of refractive index n1 is in
contact with the surface of water of refractive index 26. A equilateral prism provides the least deflection angle
n2. A beam of light is incident on vertical face of the 46º in air. Find the refracting index of an unknown
block (see figure). After refraction, a total internal liquid in which same prism gives least deflection angle
reflection at the base and refraction at the opposite of 30º.
vertical face, the ray emerges out at an angle . The
value of  is given by 27. A ray incident at angle 53° on a prism energes at an
angle at 37° as shown. If the angle of incidence is
made 50°, which of the following is a possible value
of the angle of emergence.

37°
53°

7
28. R.I. of a prism is and the angle of prism is 60°.
23. A ray of light enters a diamond (n = 2) from air and is 3
being internally reflected near the bottom as shown in
The limiting angle of incidence of a ray that will be
the figure. Find maximum value of angle  possible ? tansmitted through the prism is :

29. A prism (n = 2) of apex angle 90° is placed in air

(n = 1). What should be the angle cf incidence so
that light ray strikes the second surface at an angle
of 60°

Section I - Dispersion of Light

24. Light from a luminous point on the lower face of a
2 cm thick glass slab, strikes the upper face and the 30. A plane glass slab is placed over various coloured
totally reflected rays outline a circle of radius 3.2 letters. The letter which apears to be raised the least
cm on the lower face. What is the refractive index is :
of the glass.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.86 Theory and Exercise Book

31. A certain material has refractive indices 1.56, 1.60 37. An objects is placed 21 cm in front of a concave
and 1.68 for red, yellow and violet light respectively. mirror of radius of curvature 10 cm. A galss slab of
(a) Calculate the dispersive power. thickness 3 cm and  = 1.5 is then placed close to
(B) Find the angular dispersion produced by a thin the mirror in the space between the object and the
prism of angle 6° made of this material. mirror . The position of final image formed is

32. A flint glass prism and a crown glass prism are to be

combined in such a way that the deviation of the mean
ray is zero. The refractive index of flint and crown
Section K - Lens Maker formula and
Magnification, Image formation
glasses for the mean ray are 1.620 and 1.518
by convex and concave lens,
respectively. If the refracting angle of the flint prism is
Combination of lens, Cutting of
6.0°, what whould be the refracting angle of crown
lens
prism?
38. Lenses are constructed by a material of refractive
33. A ray of light on a trans- parent sphere with centre index 1.50. The magnitude of the radii of curvature
at C as shown in figure. The ray emergesfrom the are 20 cm and 30 cm. Find the focal lengths of the
sphere parallel to line AB. Find the refractive index possible lenses with the above specifications.
of the sphere.

39. Given an optical axis MN & the positions of a real

object A B and its image A B, determine
diagramatically the position of the lens (its optical
centre O) and its foci. Is it a converging or diverging
Section J - Refraction from a Spherical lens? Is the image real or virtual?
Surface
A
34. A spherical surface of radius 30 cm separates two
M B'
transparent media A and B with refractive indices 4/3 N
and 3/2 respectively. The medium A is on the convex B
side of the surface. Where should a point object be
placed in medium A so that the paraxial rays A'
becomes parallel after refraction at the surface?
40. A thin lens made of a material of refractive index 2
35. A narrow parallel beam of light is incident paraxially
has a medium of refractive index 1 on one side and
on a solid transparent sphere of radius r. What
should be the refractive index if the beam is to be a medium of refractive index 3 on the other side.
focused (a) At the surface of the sphere, (B) at the The lens is biconvex and the two radii of curvature
centre of the sphere. has equal magnitude R. A beam of light travelling
parallel to the principal axis is incident on the lens.
36. An object is placed 10 cm away from a glass piece Where will the image be formed if the beam is
(n = 1.5) of length 20 cm bound by spherical
incident from (a) the medium 1 and (B) from the
surfaces of radii of curvature 10 cm. Find the
position of final image formed after twice medium 3 ?
refractions.
20cm 41. A converging lens and a diversing mirror are placed
air
air at a separation of 15 cm. The focal length of the
B lens is 25 cm and that of the mirror is 40 cm. Where
object A n=1.5
should a point source be placed between the lens
ROC=10cm
10cm
and the mirror so that the light, after getting reflected
ROC=10cm
by the mirror and then getting transmitted by the
lens, comes out parallel to the principal axis?

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.87

42. A thin plano-convex lens acts like a concave mirror Paragraph (49-50)
of focal length 0.2 m when silvered from its plane A person’s far point is 2 m and his near point is 50
surface. The refractive index of the material of the cm. Find the nature, focal length and power of the
lenss is 1.5. The radius of curvature of thhe convex lenses, he must use to
surface of the lens will be 49. see distant objects and

50. read a book clearly, The least distance of distinct

Section L - Power of lens and Mirror,
vision is 25 cm.
Silverging of lens, Displacement
Method
51. Calculate the maximum angular magnification pro-
43. 2 identical thin converging lenses brought in contact duced by a magnifying glass of 5 cm focal length.
so that their axes coincide are placed 12.5 cm from Distance of distinct vision = 25 cm.
an object. What is the optical power of the system
& each lens, if the real image formed by the system Section M - Chromatic Aberration and
of lenses is four times as large as the object? Achromatism, Optical
Instrument + Eye + Luminous
Intensity
44. A convex & a concave lens are brought it close contact
along their optical axes. The focal length of the convex 52. The convex side of a thin concavo-convex lens of
lens is 10 cm. When the system is placed at 40 cm glass of refractive index 1.5 has a radius of curvature
from an object, a sharp image of the object is formed of 20 cm. The concave surface has a radius of
on a screen on the other side of the system. Determine curvature of 60 cm. What is the focal length of the
the optical power of the concave lens if the distance  lens? The convex side is silvered and placed on a
between the object & the screen is 1.6m. horizontal surface. What is the effective focal length
of the silvered lens? The concave part is filled with
water with refractive index 1.33. What is the
45. A point source of light is kept at a distance of 15 cm
effective focal length of the combined glass and water
from a converging lens, on its optical axis. The focal
lens? If the convex side is silvered, what is the new
length of the lens is 10 cm and its diameter is 3 cm.
effective focal length of the silvered compound lens?
A screen is placed on the other side of the lens,
perpendicular to the axis of lens, at a distance 20
53. A compound microscope with an objective of 1.0
cm from it. Then find the area of the illuminated
cm focal length and an eye-piece of 2.0 cm focal
part of the screen ?
length has a tube of length of 20 cm. Calculate the
46. A plano-convex lens, when silvered on the plane side,
magnifying power of the microscope, if the final
behaves like a concave mirror of focal length 30 cm.
image is formed at the near point of the eye.
When it is silvered on the convex side, it behaves like
a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm. Find the
54. To remove myopia (short sightedness) a lens of
refractive index of the material of the lens.
power 0.66D is required. The distant point of the
eye is approximately
Paragraph (47-48)
47. Find the angle of a prism of dispersive power 0.021 55. An astronomical telescope has a magnifying power
and refractive index 1.53 to form an achromatic 10. The focal length of eyepiece is 20 cm. The focal
combination with prism of angle 4.2° and disper- length of objective is
sive power 0.045 having refractive index 1.65.
56. A person can not see the objects clearly placed at a
distance more than 40 cm. He is advised to use a
48. Find the resultant deviation.
lense of power

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.88 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced

Section A - Plane Mirror Section F - Snell's Law, Apparent depth and
Normal shift, Refraction through
1. A person is in a room whose ceiling and two adjacent
a Glass slab, Lateral shift
walls are mirrors. How many images are formed ?
5. The apparent depth of water in cyclindrical water
2. Two plane mirrors of length L are separated by tank of diameter 2R cm is reducing at the rate of x
distance L and a man M2 is standing at distance L cm min–1 when water is being drained out at a
from the connecting line of mirrors as shown in constant rate. The amount of water drained in cc
figure. A man M1 is walking in a straight line at per minute is (n1 = refractive index of air, n2 =
distance 2L parallel to mirrors at speed u, then man refractive index of water)
M2 at O will be able to see image of M1 for total
time : 6. A transparent cube of 15 cm edge contains a small
air bubble . Its apparent depth when viewed through
u M1 one face is 6 cm and when viewed through the
L
opposite face is 4 cm. Then. the refractive index of
M2 the material of the cube is
O
L
L Section G - Critical Angle and Total
Internal Reflection (T.I.R.)
2L 7. A surveyor on one bank of canal observed the image
of the 4 inch and 17 ft marks on a vertical staff,
Section B, C, D, E - Mirror formula and which is partially immersed in the water and held
Magnification, Veloci ty in against the bank directly opposite to him, coincides.
Spherical Mirror, Cutting of If the 17 ft mark and the surveyor’s eye are both 6ft
Mirrors, Combination of Mirrors, above the water level, estimate the width of the canal,
Intensity of light assuming that the refractive index of the water is 4/3.

3. An observer whose least distance of distinct vision 8. A ray of light travelling in air is incident at grazing
is ‘d’, views his own face in a convex mirror of angle (incidence angle = 90º) on a medium whose
radius of curvature ‘r’. Prove that magnification refractive index depends on the depth of the medium.
r The trajectory of the light in the medium is a parabola,
produced can not exceed . y = 2x2. Find, at a
d  d2  r2
depth of 1 m in the
medium.
4. A thief is running away in a car with velocity of 20
(i) the refractive index
m/s. A police jeep is following him, which is sighted
of the medium and
by thief in his rear view mirror which is a convex
(ii) angle of incidence .
mirror of focal length 10 m. He observes that the
image of jeep is moving towards him with a velocity
9. A ray of light from a denser medium strike a rarer
of 1cm/s. If the magnification of the mirror for the
medium. The angle of reflection is r and that of
jeep at that time is 1/10. Find
refraction is r’. The reflected and refracted rays
(a) actual speed of jeep
make an angle of 90º with each other. The critical
(b) rate at which magnification is changing
angle will be
Assume that police jeep is on axis of the mirror.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.89

Section H - Prism Section K - Lens Maker formula and

10. An isosceles triangular glass prism stands with its Magnification, Image formation
base in water as shown. The angles that its two by convex and concave lens,
equal sides make with the base are  each. An Combination of lens, Cutting of
incident ray of light parallel to the water surface lens
internally reflects at the glass-water interface and
subsequently re-emerges into the air. Taking the 14. In the figure shown, find the relative speed of
refractive indices of glass and water to be 3/2 and 4/3 approach/separation of the two final images formed
after the light rays pass through the lens, at the
2
respectively, show that  must be at least tan 1 moment when u = 30 cm. The speed object = 4 cm/s.
17 The two lens halves are placed symmetrically w.r.t.
or 25.9º. the moving object.

11. A parallel beam of light falls normally on the first face

of a prism of small angle. At the second face it is
partly transmitted and partly reflected, the reflected
15. In the figure shown ‘O’ is point object. AB is
beam striking at the first face again, and emerging
from it in a direction making an angle 6º30’ with the principal axis of the converging lens of focal length
reversed direction of the incident beam. The refracted F. Find the distance of the final image from the lens.
beam is found to have undergone a deviation of 1º15’
from the original direction. Find the refractive index
of the glass and the angle of the prism.

Section J - Refraction from a Spherical

Surface
12. A concave mirror has the form of a hemisphere with
a radius of R = 60 cm. A thin layer of an unknown 16. The rectangular box shown is the place of lens. By
transparent liquid is poured into the mirror. The looking at the ray diagram, answer the following
mirror-liquid system forms one real image and questions.
another real image is formed by mirror alone, with (i) If X is 5cm then what is the focal length of the
the source in a certain position. One of them lens ?
coincides with the source and the other is at a
(ii) If the point O is 1 cm above the axis then what is
distance of l = 30 cm from source. Find the possible
the position of the image ? Consider the optical center
value(s) refractive index  of the liquid.
of the lens to be the origin.
13. A beam of diameter ‘d’ is incident on a glass
hemisphere as shown. If the radius of curvature of
the hemisphere is very large in comparison to d,
then the diameter of the beam at the base of the
hemisphere will be

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.90 Theory and Exercise Book

Section L - Power of lens and Mirror, Section M - Chromatic Aberration and

Silverging of lens, Displacement Achromatism, Optical
Method Instrument + Eye + Luminous
Intensity
17. A pin is placed 10 cm in front of convex lens of
focal length 20 cm and refractive index 1.5. The 20. The focal length of the objective of an astronomical
surface of the lens farther away from the pin is sil- telescope is 75 cm and that of the eye-piece is 5 cm.
vered and has a radius of curvature of 22 cm. How If the final image is formed at the least distance of
far from the lens is the final image formed ? distinct vision from the eye, calculate the magnify-
ing power of the telescope.
18. The height of the image formed by a converging
lens on a screen is 8 cm. For the same position of Paragraph for (21-22)
the object and screen again an image of size 12.5 A detective uses a converging lens of focal length
cm is formed on the screen by shifting the lens. The 12 cm to examine the fine details of some cloth
height of the object fibers found at the scene of a crime.

21. What is the maximum magnification given by the

19. A ray of light is incident at an angle 60° on the face
lens?
of a prism having refractive angle 30°.The ray emerg-
ing out of the prism makes an angle 30° with the
incident ray .  through which it emerges from the 22. What is the magnification for relaxed eye viewing?
surfece .

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.91

Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main

1. A fish looking up through the water sees the outside 6. Two lenses of power –15D and +5D are in Contact
world, contained in a circular horizon. If the refractive with each other. The focal length of the combination
index of water is 4/3 and the fish is 12 cm below the is (AIEEE 2007)
water surface, the radius of this circle in cm is (A) –20 cm (B) –10 cm
(AIEEE 2005) (C) +20 cm (D) +10 cm
36
(A) 36 7 (B) 7. A student measures the focal length of a convex
7
lens by putting an object pin at a distance u from
(C) 36 5 (D) 4 5 the lens and measuring the distance v of the image
pin. The graph between u and v plotted by the student
2. Two point white dots are 1 mm apart on a black paper. should look like (AIEEE 2008)
v (cm) v (cm)
They are viewed by eye of pupil diameter 3 mm.
Approximately, what is the maximum distance at which
these dots can be resolved by the eye ? [Take
wavelength of light = 500 nm] (AIEEE 2005) (A) (B)
(A) 5 m (B) 1 m
O u (cm) O u (cm)
(C) 6 m (D) 3 m
v (cm) v (cm)

3. A thin glass (refractive index 1.5) lens has optical

power of –5 D in air. Its optical power in a liquid
medium with refractive index 1.6 will be (C) (D)
(AIEEE 2005)
O u (cm) O u (cm)
(A) 1 D (B) –1 D
(C) 25 D (D) –25 D
8. In an optics experiments, with the position of the object
fixed, a student varies the positions of a convex lens
4. A light ray is incident perpendicular to one face of a
and for each position, the screen is adjusted to get a
90° prism and is totally internally reflected at the
clear image of the object. A graph between the object
glass-air interface. If the angle of reflection is 45°,
we conclude that for the refractive index n as distance u and the image distance v, from the lens, is
(AIEEE 2005) plotted using the same scale for the two axes. A
straight line passing through the origin and making an
1 angle of 45° with the x-axis meets the experimental
(A) n 
2 curve at P. The coordinates of P will be (AIEEE 2009)
(B) n  2  f f
(A) (2 f , 2 f ) (B)  , 
1 45° 2 2
(C) n 
2 (C) ( f , f ) (D) (4 f , 4 f )
45°
(D) n  2
9. A transparent solid cylinder rod has a
5. The refractive index of glass is 1.520 for red light 2
and 1.525 for blue light. Let D1 and D2 be angles of refractive index of . It is surrounded by air. A
3
minimum deviation for red and blue light respectively
in a prism of this glass. Then (AIEEE 2006) light ray is incident at the mid point of one end of
(A) D1 < D2 (B) D1 = D2 the rod as shown in the figure.
(C) D1 can be less than or greater than D2 depending
upon the angle of prism

(D) D1 > D2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.92 Theory and Exercise Book

The incident angle  for which the light ray grazes 15. Let the x-z plane be the boundary between two
along the wall of the rod is (AIEEE 2009) transparent media. Medium 1 in z  0 has a
 3 refractive index of 2 and medium 2 with z < 0
1  1 1
(A) sin   (B) sin  2  has a refractive index of
2   3 . A ray of light in
 2   1  medium 1 given by the vector
1 1 
(C) sin  (D) sin  A  6 3 ˆi  8 3jˆ  10 kˆ is incident on the plane
 3   3 
of separation. The angle of refraction in medium 2
10. As the beam enters the medium, it will (AIEEE 2010) is (AIEEE 2011)
(A) diverge (B) converge (A) 45° (B) 60°
(C) 75° (D) 30°
(C) diverge near the axis and converge near the
periphery
(D) travel as a cylindrical beam 16. A car is fitted with a convex side-view mirror of
focal length 20 cm. A second car 2.8 m behind the
11. The speed of light in the medium is (AIEEE 2010) first car is overtaking the first car at a relative speed
(A) minimum on the axis of the beam of 15m/s. The speed of the image of the second car
(B) the same everywhere in the beam as seen in the mirror of the first one is (AIEEE 2011)
(C) directly proportional to the intensity 1
(D) maximum on the axis of the beam (A) m/s (B) 10 m/s
15
1
12. A beaker contains water up to a height h1 and kerosene (C) 15 m/s (D) m/s
of height h2 above water so that the total height of 10
(water + kerosene) is (h1 + h2). Refractive index of 17. An object 2.4 m in front of a lens forms a sharp
water is 1 and that of kerosene is  2 . The apparent image on a film 12 cm behind the lens. A glass plate
shift in the position of the bottom of the beaker when 1 cm thick, of refractive index 1.50 is interposed
viewed from above is- (AIEEE 2011) between lens and film with its plane faces parallel to
film. At what distance (from lens) should to be in
 1  1  1  1
(A) 1    h2  1    h1 (B) 1    h1  1    h2 sharp focus of film ? (AIEEE 2012)
1 2 1 2
(A) 7.2 m (B) 2.4 m
 1  1  1  1 (C) 3.2 m (D) 5.6 m
(C) 1    h1  1    h2 (D) 1    h2  1    h1
1 2 1 2

18. The graph between angle of deviation () and angle

13. When monochromatic red light is used instead of of incidence (i) for a triangular prism is represented by
blue light in a convex lens, its focal length will
(AIEEE 2011) [JEE Main 2013]
(A) does not depend on colour of light
(B) increase  
(C) decrease (D) remain same

14. Statement I : On viewing the clear blue portion of (A) (B)

the sky through a Calcite Crystal, the intensity of
transmitted light varies as the crystal is rotated. O O
i i
Statement II : The light coming from the sky is
polarized due to scattering of sun light by particles
in the atmosphere. The scattering is largest for blue
light. (AIEEE 2011)  

(A) Statement I is false, Statement II is true

(B) Statement I is true, Statement II is true
(C) Statement I is true, Statement II is true, Statement (C) (D)
II is the correct explanation of Statement I
(D) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement O O
i i
II is not correct explanation of Statement I

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.93

 3
19. A thin convex lens made from crown grass       1  1  

 2 (B)  < cos–1  sin  A  sin     
has focal length f. When it is measured in two      
4 5
different liquids having refractive indices and ,   1  1  

3 3 (C)   sin–1  sin  A  sin     
it has the focal length f1 and f2 respectively. The      
correct relation between the focal lengths is :
(JEE Main 2014)   1  1  

(D)  > sin–1  sin  A  sin    
(A) f2 > f and f1 becomes negative     
(B) f1 and f2 both become negative
(C) f1 = f2 < f
23. An observer looks at a distant tree of height 10m
(D) f1 > f and f2 becomes negative
with a telescope of magnifying power of 20. To the
20. A green light is incident from the water to the air - observer the tree appears : (JEE Main 2016)
water interface at the critical angle (). Select the (A) 10 times nearer. (B) 20 times taller.
correct statement. (JEE Main 2014) (C) 20 times nearer (D) 10 times taller.
(A) The spectrum of visible light whose frequency
is more than that of green light will come out to the 24. In an experiment for determination of refractive index
air medium. of glass of a prism by i -, plot, it was found that a
(B) The entire spectrum of visible light will come ray incident at angle 35°, suffers a deviation of 40°
out of the water at various angles to the normal. and that it emerges at angle 79°. In that case which
(C) The entire spectrum of visible light will come of the following is closest to the maximum possible
out of the water at an angle of 90º to the normal. value of the refractive index ? (JEE Main 2016)
(D) The spectrum of visible light whose frequency (A) 1.6 (B) 1.7
is less than that of green light will come out to the (C) 1.8 (D) 1.5
air medium.
25. A diverging lens with magnitude of focal length 25
21. On a hot summer night, the refractive index of air
cm is placed at a distance of 15 cm from a
is smallest near the ground and increases with height
converging lens of magnitude of focal length 20 cm.
from the ground. When a light beam is directed
A beam of parallel light falls on the diverging lens.,
horizontally, the Huygens' principle leads us to
The final image formed is : (JEE Main 2017)
conclude that as it travels, the light beam :
(A) real and at a distance of 6 cm from the
(A) bends downwards (JEE Main 2015)
convergent lens.
(B) bends upwards
(B) real and at a distance of 40 cm from convergent
(C) becomes narrower
lens.
(D) goes horizontally without any deflection
(C) virtual and at a distance of 40 cm from
convergent lens.
22. Monochromatic light is incident on a glass prism of
(D) real and at distance of 40 cm from the divergent
angle A. If the refractive index of the material of
lens.
the prism is , a rav, incident at an angle , on the
face AB would get transmitted through the face
AC of the prism provided : (JEE Main 2015)

B C

  1  1  

(A)  > cos–1  sin  A  sin     
     

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.94 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced

1. The ratio of powers of a thin convex and thin 5. A point object is placed at a distance of 20 cm from
concave lens is 3/2 and equivalent focal length of a thin plano-convex lens of focal length 15 cm, if
their combination is 30 cm. Then their focal lengths the plane surface is silvered. The image will form at
respectively are [JEE 2005 (Scr)] [JEE 2006]
(A) 75, –50 (B) 75, 50
(C) 10, –15 (D) –75, 50

2. Figure shows object O. Final image I is formed after

two refractions and one reflection is also shown in
figure. Find the focal length of mirror. (in cm) :
[JEE 2005(Scr)]

(A) 60 cm left of AB (B) 30 cm left of AB

(C) 12 cm left of AB (D) 60 cm right of AB

6. Graph of position of image vs position of point object

(A) 10 (B) 15 from a convex lens is shown. Then, focal length of
(C) 20 (D) 25 the lens is [JEE 2006]

3. What will be the minimum angle of incidence such

that the total internal reflection occurs on both the
surfaces? [JEE 2005]

4. Two identical prisms of refractive index 3 are kept

(A) 0.50 ± 0.05 cm (B) 0.50 ± 0.10 cm
as shown in the figure. A light ray strikes the first
(C) 5.00 ± 0.05 cm (D) 5.00 ± 0.10 cm
prism at face AB. Find, [JEE 2005]

B D
7. Parallel rays of light from Sun falls on a biconvex
60° 60° lens of focal length f and the circular image of radius
r is formed on the focal plane of the lens. Then
60° 60° which of the following statement is correct?
A C E (A) Areaof imager2 directly proportional to f
(a) the angle of incidence, so that the emergent ray (B) Area of image r2 directly proportional to f2
from the first prism has minimum deviation. (C) Intensity of image increases if f is increased.
(B) through what angle the prism DCE should be
(D) If lower half of the lens is covered with black
rotated about C so that the final emergent ray also
paper area of image will become half. [JEE 2006]
has minimum deviation.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.95

8. A simple telescope used to view distant objects has 12. Two beams of red and violet colours are made to
eyepiece and objective lens of focal lengths fe and pass separately through a prism (angle of the prism
f0, respectively. Then [JEE 2006] is 60°). In the position of minimum deviation, the
Column I Column II angle of refraction will be - [JEE 2008]
(A) Intensity of light (P) Radius of aperature R
(A) 30° for both the colours
received by lens (Q) Dispersion of lens
(B) Angular magnification (R) focal length f0, fe (B) greater for the violet colour
(C) Length of telescope (S) spherical aberration (C) greater for the red colour
(D) Sharpness of image
(D) equal but not 30° for both the colours

9. A ray of light travelling in water is incident on its

surface open to air. The angle of incidence is , 13. A light beam is travelling from Region I to
which is less than the critical angle. Then there will
Region IV (Refer Figure). The refractive index in
be [JEE 2007]
(A) only a reflected ray and no refracted ray n0 n 0 n
Regions I, II, III and IV are n0, , and 0 ,
(B) only a refracted ray and no reflected ray 2 6 8
(C) a reflected ray and a refracted ray and the angle respectively. The angle of incidence  for which the
between them would be less than 180° – 2 beam just misses entering Region IV is Figure :
(D) a reflected ray and a refracted ray and the angle
between them would be greater than 180° – 2 [JEE 2008]

10. Statement - I
The formula connecting u, v and f for a
spherical mirror is valid only for mirros whose size
are very small compared to their radii of curvature
because [JEE 2007]
Statement - II
Laws of reflection are strictly valid for plane sur-
faces, but not for large spherical surfaces.
(A) Statement-I is True, Statement - II is True; –1  3  –1  1 
(A) sin   (B) sin  
Statement-II is a correct explanation for Statement-I 4 8
(B) Statement-I is True, Statement - II is True;
Statement - II is NOT correct explanation for
–1  1  –1  1 
Statement-I (C) sin   (D) sin  
4  3
(C) Statement-I is True, Statement-II is False
(D) Statement-I is False, Statement-II is True

14. An optical component and an object S placed along

11. In an experiment to determine the focal length (f) of
its optic axis are given in Column-I. The distance
a concave mirror by the u–v method, a student
places the object pin A on the principal axis at a between the object and the component can be varied.
distance x from the pole P. The student looks at the The properties of images are given in Column -II.
pin and its inverted image from a student shifts his/ Match all the properties of images from Column-II
her eye towards left, the image appears to the right with the appropriate components given in Column
of the object pin. Then [JEE 2007] -I. Indicate your answer by darkening the
(A) x < f (B) f < x < 2f appropriate bubbles the 4 × 4 matrix given in the
(C) x = 2f (D) x > 2f ORS. [JEE 2008]

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.96 Theory and Exercise Book

Column-I Column -II (A) The ray gets totally internally reflected at face
CD
(B) The ray comes out through face AD
(A) (p) Real image
(C) The angle between the incident ray and the
emergent ray is 90°
(D) The angle between the incident ray and the
(B) (q) Virtual image emergent ray is 120° [JEE 2010]

B
O
60°
(C) (r) Magnified image C
135°

(D) (s) Image at infinity 90° 75°

A D

15. A ball is dropped from a height of 20 m above the

surface of water in a lake. The refractive index of
18. The focal length of a thin biconvex lens is 20 cm.
water is 4/3. A fish inside the lake, in the line of fall
When an object is moved from a distance of 25 cm
of the ball, is looking at the ball. At an instant, when
in front of it to 50 cm the magnification of its image
the ball is 12.8 m above the water surface, the fish
sees the speed of ball as [Take g = 10 m/s2] m 25
changes from m25 to m50 The ratio m is
[JEE 2009] 50

(A) 9 m/s (B) 12 m/s [JEE 2010]

(C) 16 m/s (D) 21.33 m/s

19. A biconvex lens of focal length 15 cm is in front of a

16. A student performed the experiment of determination
plane mirror. The distance between the lens and the
of focal length of a concave mirror by u–v method
mirror is 10 cm. A small object is kept at a distance
using an optical bench of length 1.5 meter. The focal
of 30 cm from the lens. The final image is :
length of the mirror used is 24 cm. The maximum
error in the location of the image can be 0.2 cm. [JEE 2010]
The 5 sets of (u, v) values recorded by the student (A) virtual and at a distance of 16 cm from the mirror
(in cm) are (42,56) (48,48), (60,40), (66, 33) (78,39).
The data set(s) that cannot come from experiment (B) real and at a distance of 16 cm from the mirror
and is (are) incorrectly recorded, is (are) [JEE 2009] (C) virtual and at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror
(A) (42,56) (B) (48,48) (D) real and at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror
(C) (66,38) (D) (78,39)

17. A ray OP of monochromatic light is incident on the 20. A large glass slab ( = 5/3) of thickness 8 cm is
face AB of prism ABCD near vertex B at an incident placed over a point source of light on a plane surface.
angle of 60° (see figure). If the refractive index of It is seen that light emerges out of the top surface
the material of the prism is 3 , which of the of the slab from a circular area of radius R cm.
following is (are) correct ? What is the value of R ? [JEE 2010]

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.97

21. Image of an object approaching a convex mirror of Directions: Questions number 23 – 24 are based on
radius of curvature 20 m along its optical axis is the following paragraph.
An initially parallel cylindrical beam travels in a
25 50
observed to move from m to m in 30 medium of refractive index (I) = 0 + 2I , where
3 7
0 and 2 are positive constants and I is the intensity
seconds. What is the speed of the object in km per
of the light beam. The intensity of the beam is
hours ? [JEE 2010] decreasing with increasing radius. [JEE 2010]
23. As the beam enters the medium, it will
22. Two transparent media of refractive indices 1 and (A) diverge (B) converge
3 have a solid lens shaped transparent material of (C) diverge near the axis and converge near the
refractive index 2 between them as shown in figure periphery
in Column - II. A ray traversing these media is also (D) travel as a cylindrical beam
shown in the figure. In Column I different
relationships between 1, 2 and 3 are given. Match
24. The initial shape of the wave front of the beam is
them to the ray diagrams shown in Column II
(A) convex (B) concave
[JEE 2010]
(C) convex near the axis and concave near the
Column I Column II periphery
(D) planar

3 2 1 25. The speed of light in the medium is

(A) 1 < 2 (P)
(A) minimum on the axis of the beam
(B) the same everywhere in the beam
(C) directly proportional to the intensity I
(D) maximum on the axis of the beam

3 2 1 26. A light ray traveling in glass medium is incident on

(B) 1 > 2 (Q) glass-air interface at an angle of incidence . The
reflected (R) and transmitted (T) intensities, both as
function of  are plotted. The correct sketch is

100% 100%
T
(C) 2 = 3 (R)  3 2 1 T
Intensity

Intensity

(A) (B)
R R

0 90° 0 90°

(D) 2 > 3 (S)  3 2 1

100% 100%
T T
Intensity

Intensity

(C) (D)
(T)  3 2 1
R R
0 90° 0 90°

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.98 Theory and Exercise Book

where c is the speed of electromagnetic waves in

4
27. Water (with refractive index = ) in a tank is 18 vaccum, v its speed in the medium, r and  r are
3
the relative permittivity and permeability of the
7
cm deep. Oil of refractive index lies on water medium respectively. In normal materials, both  r
4
making a convex surface of radius of curvature and  r are positive, implying positive n for the
R = 6 cm as shown. Consider oil to act as a thin medium.
lens. An object 'S' is placed 24 cm above water
When both  r and  r are negative, one must choose
surface. The location of its image is at 'x' cm above
the bottom of the tank. then 'x' is [JEE 2011] the negative root of n. Such negative refractive index
materials can now be artificially prepared and are
S
called meta-materials. They exhibit significantly
different optical behavior, without violating any
R = 6 cm physical laws. Since n is negative, it results in a
change in the direction of propagation of the refracted
light. However, similar to normal materials, the
frequency of light remains unchanged upon refraction
even in meta-materials. [JEE 2012]
29. Choose the correct statement.
28. A bi-convex lens is formed with two thin plano- (A) the speed of light in the meta-material is v  c n
convex lenses as shown in the figure. Refractive
index n of the first lens is 1.5 and that of the second c
(B) The speed of light in the meta-material is v  n
lens is 1.2. Both the curved surfaces are of the same
radius of curvature R = 14 cm. For this bi-convex (C) The speed of light in the meta-material is v = c.
lens, for an object distance of 40 cm, the image (D) The wavelength of the light in the meta-material
distance will be – [JEE 2012]
 m  is given by  m   air n , where  air is the
n=1.5 n=1.2
wavelength of the light in air.

30. For light incident from air on a meta-material, the

appropriate ray diagram is
R =14cm
(A) –280.0 cm (B) 40.0 cm
(C) 21.5 cm (D) 13.3 cm

Paragraph for Question Nos. 29 to 30

Most materials have the refractive index, (A) (B)
n > 1. So, when a light ray from air enters a naturally
sin 1 n 2
occuring material, then by Snell's law, sin   n ,
2 1

it is understood that the refracted ray bends towards

the normal. But it never emerges on the same side
of the normal as the incident ray. According to
electromagnetism, the refractive index of the (C) (D)

c
medium is given by the relation, n      r  r ,
v

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.99

31. The image of an object, formed by a plano-convex Codes :

lens at a distance of 8 m, behind the lens, is real and P Q R S
is one-third the size of the object. The wavelength
(A) 2 3 1 4
2 (B) 1 2 4 3
of light inside the lens is times the wavelength in
3 (C) 4 1 2 3
free space. The radius of the curved surface of the
(D) 2 3 4 1
lens is – [JEE 2013]
(A) 1 m (B) 2 m
34. A point source S is placed at the bottom of a
(C) 3 m (D) 6 m
transparent block of height 10 mm and refractive
index 2.72. It is immersed in a lower refractive index
liquid as swhon in the figure. It is found that the
1 ˆ
32. A ray of light travelling in the direction
2
i  3jˆ  light emerging from the block to the liquid forms a
circular bright spot of diameter 11.54 mm on the
is incident on a plane mirror. After reflection, it travels
top of the block. The refractive index of the liquid
1 ˆ is- [JEE 2014]
along the direction
2
 
i  3jˆ . The angle of
(A) 1.21
incidence is : [JEE 2013] (B) 1.30
(A) 30° (B) 45° (C) 1.36
(C) 60° (D) 75° (D) 1.42

33. A right angled prism of refractive index µ1 is placed 35. Four combinations of two thin lenses are given in
in a rectangular block of refractive index µ2. which List I. The radius of curvature of all curved surface
is surrounded by a medium of refractive index µ3,as is r and the refractive index of all the lenses is 1.5.
shown in the figure, A ray of light ‘e’ enters the Match lens combinations in List I with their focal
rectangular block at normal incidence. Depending length in List II and select the correct answer using
upon the relationships between µ1,µ2,and µ3, it takes the code given below the lists. [JEE 2014]
one of the four possible paths ‘ef’, ‘eg’, ‘eh’ or ‘ei’.
List I List II

P. 1. 2r

Q. 2. r/2

R. 3. -r
Match the paths in List I with conditions of refractive
indices in List II and select the correct answer using
the codes given below the lists : [JEE 2013] S. 4. r
List I List II
Code :
(P) e  f 1. µ1> 2 µ2
(A) P-1, Q-2, R-3, S-4
(Q) e  g 2. µ2>µ1 and µ2>µ3
(B) P-2, Q-4, R-3, S-1
(R) e  h 3. µ1=µ2
(C) P-4, Q-1, R-2, S-3
(S) e  i 4. µ2<µ1< 2 µ2 and µ2>µ3 (D) P-2, Q-1, R-3, S-4

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.100 Theory and Exercise Book

36. A transparent thin film of uniform thickness and 39. A monochromatic beam of light is incident at 60°
on one face of an equilateral prism of refractive
refractive index n1=1.4 is coated on the convex index and emerges from the opposite face making
spherical surface of radius R at one end of a long an angle
solid glass cylinder of refractive index n2 = 1.5, as  (n) with the normal (see
shown in the figure. Rays of light parallel to the axis the figure). For n = 3 the
of the cylinder traversing through the film from air to d 60°
value of  is 60° and
glass get focused at distance f1 from the film, while dn
= m. The value of m is-
rays of light traversing from glass to air get focused at [JEE Advance 2015]
distance f2 from the film. Then [JEE 2014]
(A) f1  3R PASSAGE
Paragraph 40 to 41
(B) f1  2.8R Light guidance in an optical fiber can be understood
by considering a structure comprising of thin solid
(C) f2  2R glass cylider of refractive index n1 surrounded by a
medium of lower refractive index n2. The light
(D) f 2  1.4R guidance in the structure takes place due to
successive total internal reflections at the interface
of the media n1 and n2 as shown in the figure. All
37. Consider a concave mirror and a convex lens rays with the angle of incidence i less than a particular
(refractive index = 1.5) of focal length 10 cm each, value im are confined in the medium of refractive
separated by a distacne of 50 cm in air (refractive index n 1. The numerical aperture (NA) of the
index = 1) as shown in the figure. An object is placed structure is defined as sin im. [JEE Advance 2015]
n1>n2
at a distacne of 15 cm from the mirror. Its erect
Air Cladding n2
image formed by this combination has magnification
M 1. When the set-up is kept in a medium of Core
refractive index 7/6, the magnification becomes M2. i n1

M2
The magnitude M is [JEE Advance 2015]
1
40. For two structures namely S1 with n1 = 45 / 4
and n2 = 3/2, and S2 with n1 = 8/5 and n2= 7/5 and
taking the refractive index of water to be 4/3 and
that of air to be 1, the correct option (s) is (are)
(A) NA of S1 immersed in water is the same as that
16
of S2 immersed in a liquid of refractive index
3 15
(B) NA of S1 immersed in liquid of refractive index
38. Two identical glass rode S1 and S2 (refractive index =
16
1.5) have one convex end of radius of curvature 10 is the same as that of S2 immersed in water
15
cm. They are placed with the curved surfaces at a (C) NA of S1 placed in air is the same as that of S2
distance d as shown in the figure, with their axes 4
(shown by the dashed line) aligned. When a point immersed in liquid of refractive index
15
source of light P is placed inside rod S1 on its axis at a (D) NA of S1 placed in air is the same as that of S2
distance of 50 cm from the curved face, the light rays placed in water
emanating from it are found to be parallel to the axis 41. If two structures of same cross-sectional area, but
inside S2. The distance d is [JEE Advance 2015] different numerical apertures NA1 and NA2 (NA2
S1 S2
< NA1) are joined longitudinally, the numerical
P aperture of the combined structure is
50 cm d
NA1NA2
(A) 60 cm (B) 70 cm (A) NA  NA (B) NA1 + NA2
1 2
(C) 80 cm (D) 90 cm (C) NA1 (D) NA2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.101

42. A parallel beam of light is f=30cm

incident from air at angle 
/
on the side PQ of a right P
//
/

/


//
angled triangular prism of x

//
(–50,0) (0,0)

// ///

R=
refractive index n  2 .

10
0
Light undergoes total internal

cm
50 cm
reflection in the prism at the
face PR when  has a
minimum value of 45°. The Q
n= 2
R
50  50 3,  50
angle  of the prism is If the origin of the coordinate system is taken to be
[JEE Advance 2016]
(A) 15° (B) 22.5° at the centre of the lens, the coordinates (in cm) of
(C) 30° (D) 45° the point (x, y) at which the image is formed are
(A) (0, 0)
43. A plano-convex lens is made of a material of
refractive index n. When a small object is placed (B) (50 – 25 3, 25)
30 cm away in front of the curved surface of the
lens, an image of double the size of the object is
(C) (25,25 3)
produced. Due to reflection from the convex surface
of the lens, another faint image observed at a
distance of 10 cm away from the lens. Which of (D) (125/ 3,25 3)
the following statement(s) is(are) true?
[JEE Advance 2016]
(A) The refractive index of the lens is 2.5 46. Diameter of a plano-convex lens is 6 cm and
(B) The radius of curvature of the convex surface thickness at the centre is 3 mm. If speed of light in
is 45 cm material of lens is 2 × 108 m/s, the focal length of
(C) The faint image is erect and real
(D) The focal length of the lens is 20 cm the lens is : [JEE Advance 2016]
(A) 30 cm (B) 10 cm
44. A transparent slab of thickness d has a refractive
index n(z) that increases with z. Here z is the vertical (C) 15 cm (D) 20 cm
distance inside the slab, measured from the top. The
slab is placed between two media with uniform 47. For an isosceles prism of angle A and refractive
refractive indices n1 and n2 (>n1), as shown in the
figure. ray of light is incident with angle i from index , it is found that the angle of minimum
medium 1 and emerges in medium 2 with refraction deviation m = A. Which of the following options is/
angle f with a lateral displacement l.
[JEE Advance 2016] are correct? [JEE Advance 2017]
(A) At minimum deviation, the incident angle i1 and
n = constant
1 the refracting angle r1 at the first refracting surface
n(2) are related by r1 = (i1/2)
z d
(B) For this prism, the refractive index  and the
n2 = constant l 2
1 
angle of prism A are related as A  cos 1  
Which of the following statement(s) is(are) true? 2 2
(A)  is independent of n2
(B)  is dependent on n(z) (C) For the angle of incidence i1 = A, the ray inside
(C) n1 sin 2 = n2 sin f the prism is parallel to the base of the prism
(D) n1 sin l = (n2 – n1) sinf
(D) For this prism, the emergent ray at the second
45. A small object is placed 50 cm to the left of a thin surface will be tangential to the surface when the
convex lens of focal length 30 cm. A convax spheri- angle of incidence at the first surface is
cal mirror of radius of curvature 100 cm is placed
to the right of the lens at a distance of 40 cm. The  A 
mirror is tilted such that the axis of the mirror is at i1  sin1 sin A 4 cos2  1  cos A 
 2 
an angle  = 30º to the axis of the lens, as shown in
the figure. [JEE Advance 2016]

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.102 Theory and Exercise Book

48. A monochromatic light is travelling in a medium of 50. A wire is bent in the shape of a right angled triangle
refractive index n = 1.6. It enters a stack of glass and is placed in front of a concave mirror of focal
layers from the bottom side at an angle  = 30°. length f, as shown in the figure. Which of the figures
The interfaces of the glass layers are parallel to shown in the four options qualitatively represent(s)
each other. The refractive indices of different glass the shape of the image of the bent wire ? (These
layers are monotonically decreasing as nm = n – figures are not to scale.) ? [JEE Advance 2018]
mn, where nm is the refractive index of the mth
slab and n = 0.1 (see the figure). The ray is
refracted out parallel to the interface between the
(m–1)th and mth slabs from the right side of the stack.
What is the value of m? [JEE Advance 2017]
m
m-1

3
2
1

(A)

49. Sunlight of intensity 1.3kW m–2 is incident normally

on a thin convex lens of focal length 20 cm. Ignore
the energy loss of light due to the lens and assume
that the lens aperture size is much smaller than its
focal length. The average intensity of light, in kW (B)
m–2, at a distance 22 cm from the lens on the other
side is __________. [JEE Advance 2018]

(C)

(D)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Geometrical Optics 1.103

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

1. B 2. A 3. D 4. A 5. C 6. A 7. C
8. C 9. B 10. B 11. A 12. B 13. C 14. B
15. D 16. A 17. A 18. D 19. A 20. B 21. B
22. D 23. C 24. B 25. A 26. C 27. D 28. D
29. D 30. A 31. C 32. A 33. C 34. C 35. C
36. C 37. B 38. B 39. D 40. D 41. B 42. B
43. A 44. A 45 B 46. A 47. C 48. C 49. D
50. B 51. B 52. C 53. D 54. C 55. A 56. A
57. A 58. C 59. C 60. A 61. C 62. D 63. B
64. C 65. B 66. C 67. B 68. A 69. B 70. B
71. B 72. A 73. B 74. C 75. B

Exercise - 2 (Level-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

1. C 2. B 3. A 4. D 5. C
6. A 7. A 8. C 9. B 10. C
11. D 12. B 13. B 14. B 15. D
16. C 17. A 18. D 19. D 20. A
21. C 22. C 23. C 24. B 25. A
26. D 27. A 28. A 29. D 30. C
31. D 32. C 33. B 34. B 35. B
36. C 37. B 38. C 39. A 40. B
41. A 42. A 43. B 44. B 45. A

Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

1. B,C 2. B,D 3. A,B,D 4. A,B 5. B,C
6. B,C 7. A,B,D 8. A,D 9. A,B,C 10. B,C,D
11. B,C,D 12. A,C 13. A,C 14. B,C,D 15. A,B,C
16. A,B 17. A,C 18. A,C 19. A,C 20. B,C,D
21. ABCD 22. A,C,D 23. B,C 24. A,B 25. A,C
26. A,B 27. A,B,C,D 28. A,B,C,D

Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced

1. 4nR 2. 3d 3. first mirror 4.  = 30° 5. circle
6. 120° anticlockwise and 240° clockwise. 7. 30° clockwise
8. Positioin of image = (1 cos 60°, –1 sin 60°), Velocity of image=1 cos 60° i , +1 sin 60° j m / s
4
9. (4, 0, 0) 10. 20 m 11. ms-1 12. 0 13. 10 cm
9
14. 20 cm 15. +2 16. towards right 17. Real, inverted, height = 4 cm
2
18. 3m 19. 12 × 3 / 7 20.  10 –8 sec 21. 30 cm 22. sin   n12  n22
3
 3 1 41  1  8
23. sin1   24. 25. sin–1  38° 30°

 2  4  26. 5 2
27. 28.
 3
29. 90° 30. red 31. (a) 1/5 = 0.2° (b) 0.72° 32. 7.2° 33. 3

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.104 Theory and Exercise Book

34. 240 cm away from the seperating surface

35. (a) 2, (b) not possible, it will focus close to the centre if the refractive index is large
36. 50 cm 37. –4.93 cm 38. ± 24 cm, ± 120 cm 39. Converging
 3R  1R
40. (a) 2 –  –  (b) 2 –  –  41. 1.67 cm from the lens 42. 0.2 m
2 1 3 2 1 3

20
43. 10D, Optical power of each lens = 5D 44. – D = – 6.7 D 45. (/4) cm2
3
46. 1.5 47. –11.04° 48. –3.12° 49. –0.5D
90
50. +2D 51. 6 52. F cm 53. 270
13
54. 151.5 cm 55. 200cm 56. – 2.5 D

Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced

6L r
1. 7 2. 3. Proved (  )
u d  d2  r 2

xR 2n2
4. (a) 21 m/s, (b) 1 × 10–3 /sec 5. n1
6. 1.5

7. 16 Feet 8.  = 3, sin–1(1/3)
13
9. sin–1 (tan r) 10. Proved 11. = , A = 2°
8
12. 1.5 or ( 5 - 1) 13. 2/3 d 14. 8/5 cm/s
(3 f  2d)fd
15. l 16. 10cm, 10, 2 17. 12 cm 18. 10 cm
4fd  2d2  f 2
19. 0° 20. – 18 21. 3.1 22. 2.1

Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main

1. B 2. A 3. A 4. B 5. A 6. B 7. C
8. A 9. D 10. B 11. A 12. C 13. B 14. C
15. A 16. A 17. D 18. C 19. D 20. D 21. B
22. C 23. B 24. D 25. B

Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced

1. C 2. C 3. 60° 4. (a) i = 60°, (b) 60° (anticlockwise)
5. C 6. C 7. B 8. (A) P; (B) R; (C) R; (D) P, Q, S
9. C 10. C 11. B 12. A 13. B
14. (A)  p, q, r & s, (B)  q, (C)  p, q, r & s, (D)  p, q, r & s
15. C 16. C,D 17. A,B,C 18. 6 19. B
20. 6 cm 21. 3 22. (A)  P, R ; (B)  Q,S,T ; (C)  P, R, T ; (D)  Q,S
23. B 24. D 25. A
26. After Critical angle all the rays are Reflected and so No transmition occurs.
27. 2 cm 28. B 29. B 30. C 31. C
32. A 33. D 34. C 35. D 36. A,C
37. 7 38. B 39. 2 40. A,C 41. D
42. A 43. A, D 44. A, B, C 45. C 46. A
47. ACD 48. 8 49. 130 kW/m2 50. D

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.1

Wave Optics
CHAPTER
2
Section A - Interference Problems Planar
wave fronts
ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM :
Electromagnetic Spectrum
Spherical
wave fronts
(i) For point source (ii) For Parallel Rays

Radio Micro Infrared ROYGBIV Ultra Violet X-Rays Line source

Waves waves rays visibile light Rays r-rays

Cylindrical
Visible light is that part of electromagnetic spectrum wave front
which is visible to us
Light is studied under two sections.
(iii) For line source
1. Geometrical optics (If the dimensions of body is
Note
larger as compared to wavelength of light)
2. Wave optics (If the dimensions of body is Sources lying on same wavefront are coherent in
comparable to wavelength of light) nature because their phase difference = 0
y  A sin(ωt  kx)  (Coherent Sources) Phase
1 1

y 2  A 2sin(ωt  kx)  difference  0 (constant)
WAVE FRONT y1  A1sin(ωt  kx  30)  (Coherent Sources) Phase
• Wave front is a locus of particles having same phase. 
y 2  A2 sin(ωt  kx  60)  difference  30 (constant)
• Direction of propagation of wave is perpendicular
to wave front.
PRINCIPLE OF SUPERPOSITION
• Every particle of a wave front act as a new source
When two or more waves simultaneously pass
& is known as secondary wavelet.
through a point, the disturbance of the point is given
Shape of wavefronts vary from source to source. by the sum of the disturbances each wave would
Point source  Spherical Wave fronts produce in absence of the other wave(s). In case of
Distant Parallel Rays  Planar wave front wave on string distrubance means displacement, in
case of sound wave it means pressure change, in
Line source  Cylindrical wave fronts
case of electro magnetic wave (E.M.W) it is electric
Coherent source field or magnetic field. Superposition of two light
If the phase difference due to two source at a travelling in almost same direction results in
particular point remains constant with time, then the modification in the distribution of intensity of light
two sources are considered as coherent source. in the region of superoposition. This phenomenon
is called interference.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.2 Theory and Exercise Book

Susperposition of two sinusoidal waves y2 = A2 sin (t + kx2) respectively.

Consider superposition of two sinusoidal wave Due to superposition
(having same frequency), at a particular point. ynet = y1 + y2
Let, x1(t) = a1 sin t ynet = A1 sin (t + kx1) + A2 sin (t + kx2)
and, x2(t) = a2 sin (t + ) Phase difference between y1 & y2 = k(x2 – x1)
x = A sin (t + 0)
i.e.,  = k(x2 – x1)
where A2 = a12 + a22 + 2a1.a2cos ...(2.1)
{Refer topic : combination of SHM} 2
As  = x

a 2 sin 
and tan 0 = a  a cos  ...(2.2) (where x = path difference &  = phase difference)
1 2

Anet = A12  A 22  2A1A2 cos 

EXAMPLE 1  A net 2  A12  A 22  2A1A 2 cos 

If i1 = 3 sin t and i2 = 4 cos t, find i3 which is
given by i3 = i1 + i2  Inet = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos (as I  A2)
Sol. i3 = i1 + i2 When the two displacements are in phase, then the
resultant amplitude will be sum of the two amplitude

= 3 sin t + 4 sin (t + ) & Inet will be maximum, this is known of constructive
2
interference.
4 For Inet to be maximum
= 5 sin (t + tan–1 3 )
cos = 1
  = 2n
EXAMPLE 2 where n = {0,1,2,3,4,5...........}

S1 and S2 are two source of light which produce 2

x  2n
individually disturbance at point P given by E1 = 3 
 
sin t, E2 = 4 cos t. Assuming E 1 & E 2 to be  x = n
along the same line, find the result of their For constructive interference
superposition.
Inet = ( I1  I2 )2
S1
When I1 = I2 = I
  
E  E 1 E 2 Inet = 4 I
Sol. Anet = A1 + A2
S2 E  E1  E2  5 sin(t  tan (–1) 4 / 3 ) When superposing waves are in opposite phase, the
resultant amplitude is the difference of two
amplitudes & Inet is minimum; this is known as
INTERFERENCE
destructive interference.
Interference implies super position of waves.
For Inet to be minimum,
Whenever two or more than two waves superimpose
cos  = – 1
each other they give sum of their individual
diplacement.  = (2n + 1) 
Let the two waves coming from sources S1 & S2 be where n = {0,1,2,3,4,5...........}
y1 = A1 sin (t + kx1 )

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.3

2 EXAMPLE 4
x = (2n + 1) 
 Find the maximum intensity in case of interference
of n identical waves each of intensity I0 if the
 interference is (a) coherent and (b) incoherent.
 x = (2n  1)
2 Sol. The resultant intensity is given by
For destructive interfence I = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos

Inet = ( I1 – I 2 )2 (a) The sources are said to be coherent if they have

constant phase difference between them. Then
If I1 = I2 intensity will be maximum when  = 2n; the sources
Inet = 0 are in same phase.

Anet = A1 – A2 Thus Imax = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I2

Generally,
= ( I1  I2 ) 2
Inet = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos Similarly, for n identical waves,

If I1 = I2 = I Imax = ( I0  I0 ....) 2  n2I0

Inet = 2I + 2Icos (b) The incoherent sources have phase difference that
varies randomly with time

Inet = 2I(1 + cos ) = 4Icos2 Thus [cos]av = 0
2
Hence I = I1 + I2
Hence for n identical waves,
( I1  I 2 ) 2
Ratio of Imax & Imin = I = I0 + I0 +............ = nI0
( I1 – I 2 ) 2

EXAMPLE 3

Light from two source, each of same frequency and

travelling in same direction, but with intensity in the Section B - YDSE Experiment
ratio 4 : 1 interfere. Find ratio of maximum to
minimum intensity. YOUNG'S DOUBLE SLIT EXPERIMENT
(YDSE)
2
I max  I1  I 2  In 1802 Thomas Young devised a method to produce
Sol.   a stationary interference pattern. This was based
I min  I1 – I 2 
upon division of a single wavefront into two ; these
two wavefronts acted as if they emanted from two
2
sources having a fixed phase relationship. Hence
 I1  when they were allowed to interfere, stationary
  1
 I2  interference pattern was observed.
=  I1 
 – 1
 I2  S2
Max
d Max
S0
Central Max
2 S1
 2  1 Max
=   =9:1 Max
 2 – 1
A B D C

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.4 Theory and Exercise Book

Young's Arrangement to produce stationary

interference pattern by division of wave front S0 S1
into S1 and S2 l1 Dark fringe
In Young's interference experiment, light diffracted (Destructive
Interference)
from pinhole S0 encounters pinholes S1 and S2 in

screen B. Light diffracted from these two pinholes S2  2  1 
2

overlaps in the region between screen B and viewing 2
screen C, producting an interference pattern on
screen C. l1
S1
The geometry of experiment is simple Parallel
wavefront of a monochromatic wave are incident


Bright fringe


on two identical narrow slits, each of width a (constructive

1

separated by a distance d. The slit widths & their Interference)

2

separation are of the order of the wavelength of the S2 
incident monochromatic light. Monochromatic light
after passing through two slits S 1 & S 2 acts as
coherent sources of light waves that interfere
constructively & destructively at different point on Analysis of Interference Pattern
the screen to produce a interference pattern. We have insured in the above arrangement that the
light wave passing through S1 is in phase with that
passing through S2. However the wave reaching P
from S2 may not be in phase with the wave reaching
P from S1, because the latter must travel a longer
path to reach P than the former. We have already
discussed the phase-difference arising due to path
difference. if the path difference is equal to zero or
is an integral multiple of wavelengths, the arriving
waves are exactly in phase and undergo constructive
interference. If the path difference is an odd multiple
of half a wavelength, the arriving waves are out of
phase and undergo fully destructive interference.
Thus, it is the path difference x, which determines
the intensity at a point P.

S2 r2
P
y
r1
d 
S0
A
S1
S1 D
screen
l1
Bright fringe Path difference
(constructive
Interference) p = S1P – S2P
l1 central maxima
S2 l2 =
2 2
 d 2  d 2
= y   D – y –  D ...(1)
 2  2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.5

Approximation I Consequently,
 
For D >> d, we can approximate rays r1 and r2 as
 D
being approximately parallel, at angle  to the (2n – 1) 2d n  1, 2, 3...........
y
principle axis. ...(5)
(2n  1) D n  –1, – 2, – 3........
Now, S1P – S2P = S1A  2d
= S1 S2 sin 
Here n = ± 1 corresponds to first minima,
 path difference = d sin  ...(2)
n = ± 2 corresponds to second minima and so on.

Approximation II
FRINGE WIDTH :
r2
It is the distance between two maxima of successive
S2  order on one side of the central maxima. This is
also equal to distance between two sucessive minima.

d D
fringe width  =
r1 d
A
S1
D1
Further if  is small, i.e., y << D,
B2
y II minima D2 
sin  ~– tan  =
D
B1 First maxima
S2 I minima D1
dy
and hence, path difference = ...(3)
D B0 Central maxima
S1 D1
for maxima (constructive interference)

d.y B1
p = = n D2 
D
B2
nD D3
 y= ,
d B3
n = 0, ± 1, ± 2, ±3 ...(4) Fringe pattern in YDSE
Here n = 0 corresponds to the central maxima
Notice that it is directly proportional to wavelength
n = ± 1 correspond to the 1 st maxima and inversely proportional to the distance between
n = ± 2 correspond to the 2nd maxima and the two slits.
so on.
As vertical distance y is related to  by
for minima (destructive interference).
y
 3 5 =
p = ± ,± ± D
2 2 2
y
so  =
  D
 (2n – 1) 2 n  1, 2,3........
 p   which is referred as angular fringe width
(2n  1)  n  –1, – 2, – 3......
 2  
B = 
D d

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.6 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 5 EXAMPLE 7

In a YDSE performed with wavelength  = 5890 Å In a YDSE, D = 1m, d = 1mm and  =1/2 mm
the angular fringe width is 0.40°. What is the angular (i) Find a distance between the first and central maxima
fringe width if the entire set-up is immersed in water? on the screen.
Sol. Angular fringe width is given by (ii) Find the no of maxima and minima obtained on the
screen.

  Sol. (i) D >> d
d
Hence P = d sin 
air  air d
So,    ,  2,
d 

 water d
 water
  clearly, n <<  2 is not possible for any value of n.
d 

air
  n 3 dy
water
 air  air  Hence p = cannot be used
  water n water 4 D
For Ist maxima,
3 3 p = d sin  = 
Thus  water
   air
 = 0.40° × = 0.30°
4 4
 1
 sin = 
d 2
EXAMPLE 6   = 30°
A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths 6500Å
1
and 5200Å is used to obtain interference fringes in Hence, y = D tan  = meter
3
a Young's double slit experiment. What is the least
distance from the central maximum where the bright
fringes due to both the wavelengths coincide? The
distance between the slits is 2 mm and the distance y
S1
between the plane of slits and the screen is 120 cm.

d
Sol. The position of nth bright fringe on the screen is D
S2
nD
yn = (ii) Maximum path difference
d
Pmax = d = 1 mm
Let the nth bright fringe of 6500Å and the nth bright
 Highest order maxima
fringe of 5200Å coicide; then
d
m  6500  D n  5200  D nmax =    = 2
=  
d d
and highest order minima
m 5200 4
   d 1
n 6500 5 n min      2
 2
Thus the minimum values of m and n are 4 and 5
respectively. Total no. of maxima
= 2nmax + 1* = 5 *(central maxima)
4  6500  120 Total no. of minima = 2nmin = 4
Hence y= = 0.156 cm = 1.56 mm
0.2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.7

EXAMPLE 8 d 10 –3
(iv)   2000
Ex.8 Monochromatic light of wavelength 5000 A° is used  0.5  10 –6
in Y.D.S.E., with slit-width, d = 1mm, distance n = 1000 is not << 2000
between screen and slits, D = 1m. If intensity at the Hence now p = d sin  must be used
two slits are I1 = 4I0 , I2 = I0, find
Hence, d sin  = n = 1000 
(i) fringe width 
 1
(ii) distance of 5th minima from the central maxima  sin  = 1000 =
d 2
on the screen
  = 30°
1
(iii) Intensity at y = mm 1
3
y = D tan  = meter
3
(iv) Distance of the 1000th maxima
(v) Distance of the 5000th maxima (v) Highest order maxima

D d
Sol. (i)   nmax =   = 2000
d  
Hence, n = 5000 is not possible.
5000  10 –10  1
=
1  10 –3
EXAMPLE 9
= 0.5 mm
A beam of light consisting of wavelength 6000 Å
D and 4500 Å is used in YDSE with D = 1 m and d =
(ii) y = (2n – 1)
2d 1 mm. Find the least distance from the central
n=5 maxima, where bright fringes due to the two
wavelengths coincide.
 y = 2.25 mm
1D 6000  10 –10  1
1 Sol. 1 =  = 0.6 mm
(iii) At y = mm d 10–3
3
y << D 2 D
2 = = 0.45 mm
d
dy
Hence p = Let n1 th maxima of 1 and n2 th maxima of 2
D
coincide at a position y.
2 Then y = n1P1 = n2P2 = LCM of 1 and 2
 =  y = LCM of 0.6 cm and 0.45 mm

y = 1.8 mm
dy 4  At this point 3rd maxima for 6000 Å & 4th maxima
p = 2 
D 3 for 4500 Å coincide
Now resultant intensity

I = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos  GEOMETRICAL PATH & OPTICAL PATH

Actual distance travelled by light in a medium is
= 4I0 + I0 + 2 4I02 cos  called geometrical path (x). Consider a light wave
given by the equation
4
= 5I0 + 4I0 cos = 3I0 E = E0 sin (t – kx + )
3
If the light travels by x, its phase changes by

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.8 Theory and Exercise Book

 yd
kx = x , where , the frequency of light does and p = – t( – 1) If y << D as well
v D
not depend on the medium, but v, the speed of light

c P
depends on the medium as v =


S1 O'
Consequently, change in phase, (Central bright
fringe)
d
 O
 = kx = (x)
c S2

It is clear that a wave travelling a distance x in a

medium of refractive index  suffers the same phase D
change as when it travels a distance x in vacuum.
For central bright fringe;
i.e. a path length of x in medium of refractive index
 is equivalent to a path length of x in vacuum. p = 0
The quantity x is called the optical path length of yd
  t( – 1)
light, xopt. And in terms of optical path length, phase D
difference would be given by,
D 
 2  y = OO = ( – 1) t = ( – 1) t.
 = x opt =  x opt .....(1) d 
c 0
The whole fringe pattern gets shifted by the same
where 0 = wavelength of light in vacuum distance
However in tems of the geometrical path length x,
D 
 = ( – 1).t = ( – 1) t
d 
 2 Notice that this shift is in the direction of the slit
 = (x) = x ...(2)
c  before which the glass slab is placed. It happens so
where  = wavelength of light in the medium because S2 compensates the path difference (arised
due to optical path length covered by S1) by covering
0
( = ). more geomatrical path length. If the glass slab is

placed before the upper slit, the fringe pattern gets
shifted upwards and if the glass slab is placed before
Displacement of fringe the lower slit the fringe pattern gets shifted
downwards.
On introduction of a glass slab in the path of the
light coming out of the slits –
On introduction of the thin glass-slab of thickness t EXAMPLE 10
and refractive index , the optical path of the ray In a YDSE with d = 1 mm and D = 1 m, slabs of
S1P increases by t( – 1). Now the path difference (t = 1 m,  = 3) and (t = 0.5 m,  = 2) are
between waves coming form S1 and S2 at any point introduced in front of upper and lower slit
P is respectively. Find the shift in the fringe pattern.
p = S2P – (S1P + t( – 1)) Sol. Optical path for light coming from upper slit S1 is
= (S2P – S1P) – t( – 1) S1P + 1 m (2 – 1) = S2P + 0.5 m
 p = d sin  – t ( – 1) if d << D Similarly optical path for light coming from S2 is
S2P + 0.5 m (2 – 1) = S2P + 0.5 m

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.9

Path difference :
P
p = (S2P + 0.5 m) – (S1P + 2m)
= (S2P – S1P) – 1.5 m S1

yd d 
= – 1.5 m
D S2 dsin
For central bright fringe p = 0

1.5 m
 y = 1mm × 1 m = 1.5 mm.
If the central maxima ocupies position of nth fringe,
Then ( – 1)t = n= d sin 
The whole pattern is shifted by 1.5 mm upwards
( – 1)t (1.17 – 1)  1.5  10 –7
sin = = = 0.085
d 3  10 –7
EXAMPLE 11
Hence is angular position of central maxima is
Interference fringes were produced by Young's  = sin–1 (0.085) = 4.88°
double slit method, the wavelength of light used being For small angles sin  ~–  ~– tan 
6000 Å. The separation between the two slits is 2
mm. The distance between the slits and screen is 10 y
As tan  =
cm. When a transpoarent plate of thickness 0.5 mm D
is placed over one of the slits, the fringe pattern is y ( – 1)t
so 
displaced by 5 mm. Find the refractive index of the D d
material of the plate. Shift of central maxima is
Sol. Here, d = 2 cm = 2 × 10–3 m D(  – 1) t
Y= .
D = 10 cm = 0.10 m, d
t = 0.5 mm = 0.5 × 10–3 m This formula can be used if D is given.
x = 5 mm = 5 × 10–3 m
YDSE WITH OBLIQUE INCIDENCE :
 = 6 × 10–7 m In YDSE, ray is incident on the slit at an inclination
of 0 to the axis of symmetry of the experimental
D
As x0 = ( – 1)t set-up for points above the central point on screen,
d
(say for P1)
p = d sin 0 + (S2P1 – S1P1)
x 0 .d 5  10 –3  2  10–3
 –1=   0.2  p = d sin0 + dsin1 (If d << D)
D  t 0.10  0.5  10 –3
For point O, p = dsin0 (because S2O = S1O)
or  = 1 + 0.2 = 1.2 and for points below O on the screen, (say for P2)

EXAMPLE 12 S1
P1
In a YDSE light of wavelength  = 5000 Å is used,
0 1
which emerges in phase from two slits a distance
O
d = 3 × 10–7 m apart. A transparent sheet of thickness 2
t = 1.5 × 10–7 m, refractive index n = 1.17, is placed dsin 0 S2 P2
over one of the slits. Where does the central maxima
of the interference now appear?
B0
Sol. The path differene introduced due to introduction O'
of transparent sheet is given by x = ( – 1)t.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.10 Theory and Exercise Book

p = |(dsin0 + S2P2) – S1P2| SHAPE OF INTERFERANCE PATTERN :

= |(dsin0 – (S1P2 – S2P2)| 1. Shape of the Pattern when the interference takes
 p = |d sin 0 – d sin 2| (if d << D) place due to waves produced by two slits.
We obtain central maxima at a point where, p = 0
(d sin 0 – d sin 2) = 0 or 2 = 0
dark fringe
This corresponds to the point O in the diagram Bright fringe
Hence we have finally for path difference. central maxima

 d(sin  0  sin )  for po int s above O


p  d(sin  0 – sin )  for po int s between O & O'
 d(sin  0 – sin )  for po int s below O'
 Side view of slits linear fringes

EXAMPLE 13
2. Shape of the Pattern when the interference takes
In YDSE with D = 1m, d = 1mm light of wavelength place due to waves produced by two point
500 nm is incident at an angle of 0.57° w.r.t the axis sources(where the line of sources is perpendicular
of symmetry of the experimental set up. If centre of to the screen).
symmetry of screen is O as shown.
(i) find the position of central maxima
(ii) Intensity at point O in terms of intensity of central
maxima I0 dark fringe
bright fringe
(iii) Number of maxima lying between O and the central central maxima
maxima. S1 d  n S2

Point sources
Screen Concentric Circular
fringes
S1 P
y
0.57° 3. Shape of the Pattern when the interference takes
O place due to waves produced by two point
S2
sources(where the line of sources is parellel to the
screen).

Sol.(i)  = 0 = 0.57°
Point sources

 y = – D tan ~– S1

 0.57  S2
– D  = – 1 meter ×  57 rad
Screen
 y = – 1cm
(ii) for point 0,  = 0
Hence, p = d sin 0,
bright fringe
d0 = 1 mm × (10–2 rad) dark fringe
= 10,000 nm
= 20 × (500 nm) central maxima
 p = 20 
Hence point O corresponds to 20th maxima
 intensity at O = I0
(iii) 19 maxima lie between central maxima and O, Hyperbolic fringes
excluding maxima at O and central maxima.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.11

YDSE WITH WHITE LIGHT

Central Maxima position (where phase difference Incident & Reflected light
= 0) is independent of the wavelength of light.
Air
White light is used to find out the central maxima
position of YDSE set up because at this position 
d
only, all the wavelength show constructive
interference i.e. why we get white spot at that
Air
position.
However slightly below or above the position of Transmitted light
central maxima fringes will be coloured.
VIBGYOR Solving for  and inserting the given data, we obtain

2d
 
m  1/ 2
D
& as we known y  (2) (1.33)(320 nm)
d =
m  1/ 2
 As we move away from central maxima first maxima
& minima are of violet colour but in the near by 851nm
=
m  1/ 2
region of central maxima reddish colour will
dominate because in this region intensity of violet for m = 0, this give us  = 1700 nm, which is in the
colour decreases at a faster rate as compared to red infrared region. For m = 1, we find I = 567 nm,
colour. which is yellow-green light, near the middle of the
In usual interference pattern with a monochromatic visible spectrum. For m = 2,  = 340 nm, which is
the ultraviolet region. So the wavelength at which
source, a large number of identical interference
the light seen by the observer is brightest is
fringes are obtained & it is usually not possible to
determine the position of central maxima  = 567 nm. Ans.
Interference with white light is used to determine
the position of central maxima in such case. Note

When a light gets reflected from a denser medium

there is an abrupt phase change of p no phase change
EXAMPLE 14 occurs when reflection takes place from rarer medium
White light, with a uniform intensity across the
visible wavelength range 430–690 nm, is
perpendicularly incident on a water film, of index of EXAMPLE 15
refraction  = 1.33 and thickness d = 320 nm, that
Find the minimum value of x for which a maxima is
is suspended in air. At what wavelength  is the light
obtained at P.
reflected by the film brightest to an observer ?
Sol. This situation is like that of Figure shown, for which
equation written below gives the interference
maxima. P

x=?
1
2d = (m + ) for constructive interference.
2 //////////////////////////////////

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.12 Theory and Exercise Book

Sol. For maxima, x=  (because x should be minimum) Section C, D - Other Experiment (Fresnell’s
Path difference between the direct & reflected ray bilets, etc.) and YDSE thin Film

 THIN FILM INTERFERENCE :

=x+ x
2
When light passes the boundary between two
(due to reflection, a phase change of  or path transparent media some light is reflected at the
 boundary * some is refracted through the boundary.
change of takes place)
2 As shown in the figure some light is reflected from
first surface & some from second surface. If we

 x x consider a monochromatic incident light the two
2
reflected waves are also monochromatic incident light
 wave via amplitude division. These waves interfer
2x =
2 since they are superposed along the same normal line.
The phase difference between two waves arises due to

 x= 1. Optical path difference (due to distance travelled)
4
2. Reflection from a denser medium

EXAMPLE 16
(the second factor is irrelavant for reflection at rarer
medium.)
Find the value of  for which a maxima is obtained
at P.

os 2

light reflected
cc

Medium 1
 frame = surface

d se

d dsec 

Medium 2 Light reflected

P from II surface
Sol. For maxima at P, x = 
Path difference between direct & reflected ray Three situation may arise :
 1. Neither wave experience a phase change upon
= d sec  cos 2 + + d sec  = 
2 reflection
(1 > 2 > 3)

d sec  (1 + cos 2) =
2

 1
d sec  (2 cos2) =
2

 2 (no phase
t
cos  = 4 d Change)

3 (no phase change)

–1   
  = cos   (reflection
 4d  from rarer medium)

2 2 t
x = 
1

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.13

2. Both the wave suffer a phase change upon reflection 2ut = n

3 > 2 > 1 (for destructive interference)

 1
1 2ut =  n   
 2

(for constructive interference)

2 Phase change
t
of 
EXAMPLE 17
3 phase change A glass lens is coated on one side with a thin film of
of 
magnesium fluoride (MgF2) to reduce reflection from
the lens surface (figure). The index of refraction of
2 2
x =  t MgF2 is 1.38; that of the glass is 1.50. What is the
1
least coating thickness that eliminates (via
In either of the above cases the phase change due to interference) the reflections at the middle of the
reflection is irrelevant; no difference in phase result visible specturm ( = 550 nm) ? Assume the light is
due to reflection. In either of these cases phase approximately perpendicular to the lens surface.
change is determined solely from path difference. Sol. The situation here differs from shown figure in that
Condition for construction Interference n3 > n2 > n1. The reflection at point a still introduces
a phase difference of  but now the reflection at
2n 2 t
 n point b also does the same (see figure) Unwanted
n1
reflections from glass can be, suppressed (at a chosen
Condition for destructive interference wavelength) by coating the glass with a thin
transparent film of magnesium fluoride of a properly
2n 2 t  1 chosen thickness which introduces a phase change
  n  
n1  2 of half a wavelength. For this, the path length
3. One of the reflected waves experience a phase difference 2L within the film must be equal to an
change of  radian upon reflection & the other wave odd number of half wavelengths:
does not
Air MgF2
n1 = 1.00 n2 = 1.33 Glass
 n3 = 1.50
x = 2t – r2
2
c

Due to phase change of  (path change of ) r1
2 b

the conditions are reversed.  a
L
i

2L = (m + 1/2)n2
air


 Phase change
t or, with n2 = n
of  2'

air 2n2L = (m + 1/2) 

no phase change
(Reflection from rarer medium) We want the least thickness for the coating, that is,

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.14 Theory and Exercise Book

the smallest L. Thus we choose m = 0, the smallest

28  10 –7
value of m. Solving for L and inserting the given (iv) =
7
data, we obtain.
= 4.0 × 10–7 m
 550 nm
L = 4n  (4)(1.38) = 96.6 nm = 4000 Å
2
The condition for bright fringe or strong reflection is

(2n  1)
EXAMPLE 18 2 t =
2
White light may be considered to have  from 4000
Å to 7500 Å. If an oil film has thickness 10–6 m, 4t
or  =
deduce the wavelengths in the visible region for (2n  1)
which the reflection along the normal direction will Substituting the values of  and t, we get
be (i) weak, (ii) strong. Take  of the oil as 1.40.
Sol. The condition for dark fringe or weak reflection 4  1.4  10 –6
=
when seen in reflected light is 2 t cos r = n, where 2n  1
n is an integer.
56  10 –7
For normal incidence, r = 0 and cos r = 1 = m
2n  1
so that 2 t = n
For values of n < 4 or > 6, the values of  do not lie
2t in the visible range. But for n = 4, 5, 6 the following
or  
n waelengths lie in the visible range :
Substituting the values of  and t, we get
56  10 –7
(i) =
2  1.4  10–6 28  10 –7 24 1
  m
n n = 6.222 × 10–7 m
For values of n < 4 or > 7, the values of  do not lie = 6222 Å
in the visible range 4000 Å to 7500 Å. But for values
of n = 4, 5, 6, 7, the following wavelengths lie in the
THE LLOYD'S MIRROR EXPERIMENT :
visible region :

28  10 –7 Interference
(i) = s Area
4
a
= 7.0 × 10–7 m
d = 2a O
= 7000 Å a
I D
28  10 –7 Screen
(ii) =
5
In this experiment the light reflected from a long
= 5.6 × 10–7 m mirror & the light coming directly from the source
= 5600 Å without reflection produce interference on a screen
i.e. source & Image behave as coherent sources.
28  10 –7 An important feature of this experiment lies in the
(iii) =
6 fact that when the screen is placed in contact with
= 4.667 × 10–7 m the end of the mirror, the edge of the reflecting surface
= 4667 Å comes at the centre of dark fringe instead of a bright

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.15

fringe. The direct beam does not suffer any phase the slit source S into two beams AC & BE. When a
change, this means that the reflected beam undergoes screen MN is placed as shown in the figure, the
a phase change of  radian. interference fringes are observed only in the region
Hence at any point P on the sceen the condition for BC. If the screen MN is removed, the two beam
minima & maxima are will overlap over the whole region AE.
If A is the angle of refraction of thin prism &  is
S2P – S1P = n [For minima]
the refractive index of its medium, then the angle of
  deviation produced by the prism is
S2P – S1P =  n  2   [For maxima]
 = A ( – 1)
If l1 is the distance between the source & the prism,
then the separation between virtual sources is
EXAMPLE 19 d = 2 1 = 2A( – 1) 1
In Lloyd's interference experiment, 10 fringes occupy If 2 is the distance between the prism & the screen,
a space of 1.5 mm. The distance between the source then the distance between virtual sources & the
and the screen is 1.25 m. If light of wavelength 6000 screen is given by
Å is used, find the distance of the source from the D = 1 +2
plane minor. Thus, by using the result of young's experiment, the
fringe width is given by
15
.
Sol. Here = mm = 0.15 × 10–3 m D
10

d
D = 1.25 m,
 = 6000 Å = 6 × 10–7 m (l1  l 2 )
  2 l1
D
As =
d
  l2 
 1  
D 1.25  6  10 –7 2  l1 
 d= = m
 0.15  10–3
  l2 
= 50 × 10–4 m = 5.0 mm   1  
2A(  – 1)  l1 
Hence distance of source from the plane mirror
Fringes observed in the Fresnel's biprism experiment
d are vertical stringht lines.
= = 2.5 min.
2

EXAMPLE 20
FRESENEL'S BIPRISM
In a biprism experiment, the slit is illuminated with
M
light of wavelength 4800 Å. The distance between
 A the slit and diprism is 20 cm and that between biprism
P
S1
A and eyepiece is 80 cm. If two virtual sources are
B 0.3 cm apart, determine the distance between the
S 5th bright band on one side of the central bright
band and the 4th dark bank on the other side.
S2
C
Sol. Here  = 4.8 × 10–7 m, d = 0.3 × 10–2 m,
 D = 20 + 80 = 100 cm = 1 m
E
N
Distance of 5th bright from the central bright band is

Fig shows the Fresnel's biprism experiment 

x5 = 5
schematicaly. The thin prism P refracts light from d

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.16 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 21 d= d1d 2 (Displacement method)

In a biprism experiment, fringe width is measured
as 0.4 mm. When the eyepiece is moved away from = 0.405  0.209 cm = 0.2909 cm
the biprism through 30 cm, the fringe width increases Also D = 100 cm
by 50%. If the two virtual sources are 0.6 mm apart,  = 5893 × 10–8 cm
find the wavelength of light used.  Fringe width,
Sol. Here 1 = 0.4 mm
D
= 0.4 × 10–3 m =
d
150
2 =  = 1.5 1
100 1 100  5893  10 –8
= cm
0.2909
D2 = D1 + 30 cm
= D1 + 0.3 m, d = 0.0203 cm.
–3
= 0.6 mm = 0.6 × 10 m
HUYGEN'S PRINCIPLE :
D1
As 1  The various postulates are :
d
1. Each source of light is a centre of disturbance from
D which waves spread in all directions. All particles
and  2  2
d equidistant from the source & vibrating in same
phase lie on the surface known as wavefront.
1 D1
  D 2. Wave propagates perpendicular to wavefront
2 2
3. Each ray take same time to reach from one
wavefront to another wavefront
1 D1
or 1.5  D  0.3 4. Every point on a wavefront is a source of new
1
disturbance which produces secondary wavelets.
or D1 = 0.6 m These wavelets are spherical & travel with the speed
 Wavelenth of light used, of light in all directions in that medium.
5. Only forward envelope enclosing the tangents at the
1d 0.4  10 –3  0.6  10 –3
= D = secondary wavelets at any instant gives the new
1 0.6
position of wavefront.
= 4 × 10–7 m = 4000 Å There is no backward flow of energy when a wave
travels in the forward direction.
EXAMPLE 22 F2
F
Interference fringes are produced by a Fresnel's F1 F1 F2
biprism in the focal plane of reading microscope
A2
which is 100 cm from the slit. A lens interposed
between the biprism and the microscope gives two
Ray B2
images of the slit in two positions. If the images of
the slits are 4.05 mm apart in one case, 2.90 mm in
the other and the wavelength of light used is 5893 C2

Å, find the distance between two consecutive bands.

Sol. Here d1 = 4.05 mm = 0.405 cm
d2 = 2.09 mm = 0.209 cm l
Distance between the two coherent sources will be

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.17

EXAMPLE 23 secondary wavelets starting at different times.

Compare this with the earlier application (shown
For the given ray diagram, draw the wavefront
figure) where we start them at the same time.
The preceding argument gives a good physical picture
of how the refracted and reflected waves are built
b up from secondary wavelets. We can also understand
the laws of reflection and refraction using the concept
that the time taken by light to travel along different
rays from one wavefront to another must be the
same. (Fig) Shows the incident and reflected
will behave
as point wavefronts when a parallel beam of light falls on a
Sol.
source plane surface. One ray POQ is shown normal to
both the reflected and incident wavefronts. The angle
of incidence i and the angle of reflection r are defined
Spherical
Wavefront
as the angles made by the incident and reflected
Planar wavefront
rays with the normal. As shows in fig shown, these
are also the angles between the wavefront and the
surface.
REFLECTION AND REFRACTION : B
Air v1t
We can use a modified form of Huygens' construction
A i D v1t
to understand reflection and refraction of light. Figure v 2t C
v,t
(a) shows an incident wavefront which makes an E water r' i r
angle 'i' with the surface separating twc media, for (b)
(a)
example, air and water. The phase speeds in the
two media are v1 and v2. We can see that when the Medium-1
P
point A on the incident wavefront strikes the surface, P
the point B still has to travel a distance BC = AC sin Q

i, and this takes a time t = BC/v1 = AC (sin i)/v1. A i r

A
i C
B O r'
After a time t, a secondary wavefront of radius v2t O
R
with A as centre would have travelled into medium (i) (ii)
Medium-2
2. The secondary wavefront with C as centre would
(c)
have just started, i.e. would have zero radius. We
also show a secondary wavelet originating from a Figure (a) Huygens' construction for the (a)
point D in between A and C. Its radius is less than refracted wave. (b) Reflected wave. (c) Calculation
v2t. The wavefront in medium 2 is thus a line passing of propagation time between wavefronts in (i)
through C and tangent to the circle centred on A. reflection and (ii) refraction.
We can see that the angle r made by this refracted We now calculate the total time to go from one
wavefront with the surface is given by AE = v2t = wavefront to another along the rays. From Fig. (c),
AC sin r. Hence, t = AC (sin r)/v2. Equating the we have we have Total time for light to reach from
two expressions for 't' gives us the law of refraction P to Q
in the form sin i/ sir r = v1/v2. A similar picture is
drawn in shown figure (b) for the reflected wave PO OQ
= v  v
which travels back into medium 1. In this case, we 1 1

denote the angle made by the reflected wavefront

with the surface by r, and we find that i = r. Notice AOsin i OBsin r
= 
that for both reflection and refraction, we see v1 v1

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.18 Theory and Exercise Book

where n2 is the refrective index of medium 2 with

OA sin i  (AB – OA)sin r
= respect to vacuum, also called the absolute refractive
v1
index of the medium. A similar equation defines
absolute refractive index n1 of the first medium.
ABsin r  OA(sin i – sin r )
= From Eq. we then get
v1
v1 (c / n1 ) n 2
Different rays normal to the incident wavefront strike n21 = v  (c / n )  n
2 2 1
the surface at different points O and hence have
different values of OA. Since the time should be the The absolute refractive index of air about 1.0003,
same for all the rays, the right side of equation must quite close to 1. Hence, for all practical purposes,
actually be Independent of OA. The condition, for absolute refractive index of a medium may be taken
this to happen is that the coefficient of OA in Eq. with respect to air. For water, n1 = 1.33, which means
(should be zero, i.e., sin i = sin r. We, thus, have the
c
law of reflection, i = r. Figure also shows refraction at v1 = , i.e. about 0.75 times the speed of light in
1.33
a plane surface separating medium 1 (speed of light
v1) from medium 2 (speed of light v2). The incident vacuum. The measurement of the speed of light in
and refracted wavefronts are shown, making angles i water by Foucault (1850) confirmed this prediction
and r' with the boundary. Angle r' is called the angle of the wave theory.
of refraction. Rays perpendicular to these are also Once we have the laws of reflection and refraction,
drawn. As before, let us calculate the time taken to the behaviour of prisms. lenses, and mirrors can be
travel between the wavefronts along any ray. understood. These topice are discussed in detial in
the previous Chapter. Here was just describe the
PO OR behaviour of the wavefronts in these three cases (Fig)
Time taken from P to R = v  v
1 2
(i) Consider a plane wave passing through a thin prism.
Clearly, the portion of the incoming wavefront which
A sin i (AC – OA) sin r ' travels through the greatest thickness of glass has
= 
v1 v2 been delayed the most. Since light travels more slowly
in glass. This explains the tilt in the emerging
ACsin r '  sin i sin r '  wavefront.
=  OA  – 
v2  v1 v2  (ii) A concave mirror produces a similar effect. The
centre of the wavefront has to travel a greater
This time should again be independent of which ray
distance before and after getting reflected, when
we consider. The coefficient of OA in Equation is,
compared to the edge. This again produces a
therefore, zero,. That is,
converging spherical wavefront.
sin i v1 (iii) A concave mirror produces a similar effect. The
  n 21
sin r ' v 2 centre of the wavefront has to travel a greater
distance before and after getting reflected, when
where n21 is the refractive index of medium 2 with
compared to the edge. This again produces a
respect to medium 1. This is Snell's law of, refraction
convering spherical wavefront.
that we have already dealt with from Eq. n21 is the
ratio of speed of light in the first medium (v1) to that (iv) Concave lenses and convex mirrors can be
in the second medium (v2). Equation is, known as understood from time delay arguments in a simalr
the Snell's law of refraction. If the first medium is manner. One interesting property which is obvious
vacuum, we have from the pictures of wavefronts is that the total time
taken from a point on the object to the corresponding
sin i c
  n2 point on the image is the same measured along any
sin r ' v 2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.19

ray (Fig.). For example, when a convex lens focuses

light to form a real image, it may seem that rays
Note
going through the centre are shorter. But because to
the slower speed in glass, the time taken is the same Greater the wave length of wave higher will be its
as for rays travelling near the edge of the lens. degree of diffraction. This is the reason that
diffraction of sound & radio waves is easily observed
but for diffraction of light, additional arrangement
have to be arrange.
 sound  light

(a) (b) Wave length of sound is nearly equal to size of

obstacle. If size of obstactle is a & wavelength is l
then,
S.No. aV / S Diffraction
(1) a   Not possible
(2) a   Not possible
(3) a  Possible

(c)

4. Interpretation of Diffraction
As a result of diffraction, maxima & minima of light
intensities are found which has unequal intensities.
Diffraction is the result of superposing of waves from
infinite number of coherent sources on the same
wavefront after the wavefront has been distorted
EXTRA PORTION FOR JEE MAIN
by the obstacle.

Section E - Diffraction Single Slit 5. Example of Diffraction

DIFFRACTION (a) When an intense source of light is viewed with the

paritally opened eye, colours are observed in the
1. Meaning of Diffraction
light.
It is the spreading of waves round the corners of an
(b) Sound produced in one room can be heard in the
obstacle, of the order of wave length.
nearby room.
2. Definition of Diffraction (c) Appearance of a shining circle around the section of
The phenomenon of bending of light waves around sun just before sun rise.
the sharp edges of opaque obstacles or aperture and (d) Coloured spectrum is observed if a light source at
their encroachment in the geometrical shadow of far distant is seen through a thin cloth
obstacle or aperture is defined as diffraction of light.
6. Fraunhofer Diffraction
3. Necessary Conditions of Diffraction of Fraunhofer diffraction deals with wavefronts that
Waves are plane on arrival and an effective viewing distance
The size of the obstacle (a) must be of the order of of infinity. If follows that fraunhofer diffraction is
the wavelength of the waves (). an important special case of fresnel diffraction. In
youngs double slit experiment, we assume the screen
a
1 to be relatively distant, that we have fraunhofer

conditions.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.20 Theory and Exercise Book

(C) The maxima or minima is observed due to the

7. Difference between Interference &
superposition of waves emerging from infinite
Diffraction of Light
secondary sources between A & B points of slit.
Interference Diffraction (D) Fringe width :
1. Two coherent sources One coherent source is The distance between two secondary minima formed
are necessary necessary on two sides of central maximum is known as the
width of central maximum
2. All fringes has same Fringes have unequal
2f
width width W=
a
3. Width of bright fringes Width of bright fringes is
is equal to other fringesjust doubled to other f = focal distance of convex lense
fringes M2 x2
4. Intensity of dark fringe Intensity of dark fringe is
is zero not zero M1
5. All bright fringes have As order of bright fringes x1
equal intensity increases, intensity goes 1
down 1
6. For bright fringes : For bright fringes : 2
M’1
(a) Path difference

(b) Phase difference

= 2n a = width of slit
7. For drak fringes; For dark fringes: 2
(a) Path Difference D = 2n /2 Angular width = W =
a
D = (2n – 1) /2 d = 2n
(b) Phase difference
9. Points to Remember
d = (2n – 1)
(A) Greymaldy discovered the diffraction.
(B) Intensity of diffraction pattern decreases, if size of
8. Fraunhofer diffraction for single slit obstacle is increased.
In this diffraction pattern central maxima is bright (C) Superposition of waves causes both diffraction &
on the both side of it, maxima & minima occurs Interference. Superposition of secondary waves
symmetrically originated from two coherent sources generates
interference. Superposition of secondary wavelets
Diffraction rays generated from same wavefront, is called diffraction.
P (D) Interference fringes has equal width but diffraction
fringes has unequal width.
(E) In diffraction pattern, intensity of bright fringes is
a O different but for interference , it is equal.
(F) Intensities of dark fringes of interference is zero but
incident plane for diffraction, it is not equal to zero.
wavefront (G) Effect of diffraction can be observed in only
geometrical shadow of end region.
Lens Screen
Slit (H) In diffraction bright central fringe has double width,
in comparison to others.
(A) For Diffraction Maxima :
a sin  = (2n – 1) /2
(B) For Diffraction Minima :
a sin  = n

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.21

Section F - Polarisation By Reflection : Brewster discovered that when light

is incident at a particular angle on a transparent
POLARISATION substance, the reflected light is completely plane
Unpolarised light polarised with vibrations in a plane perpendicular to
the plane of incidence. This specific angle of
(A) An ordinary beam of light consists of a large number
incidence is called polarising angle  and is related
of waves emitted by the atoms or molecules of the P
to the refractive index  of the material through the
light source. Each atom produces a wave with its
relation :
own orientation of electric vector. However, because
tan  =  ....(1)
of all directions are equally probable the resulting p
This is known as Brewster’s law.
electromagnetic wave is a superposition of waves
In case of polarisation by reflection :
produced by individual atomic sources. This wave
(i) For I = p, refracted light is plane polarised.
is called unpolarised light.
(ii) For I =  p , reflected and refracted rays are
(B) All the vibrations of an unpolarised light at a given perpendicular to each other.
instant can be resolved in two mutually perpendicular (iii) For  < or > p, both reflected and refracted light
directions and hence an unpolarised light is equivalent become partially polarised.
to superposition of two mutually perpendicular
identical plane polarised light. Intensity of Light Emerging from a Polariod
If plane polarised light of intensity I0(= KA2) is
Plane polarised light incident on a polariod and its vibrations of amplitude
(A) If somehow we confine the vibrations of electric A make an angle  with transmission axis, as polariod
vector in one direction perpendicular to the direction will pass only those vibrations which are parallel to
of wave motion, the light is said to be plane polarised its transmission axis, i.e., A cos , so the intensity of
and the plane containing the direction of vibration emergent light will be
and wave motion is called plane of polarisation. I = K(A cos )2
= KA2 cos2
(B) If an unpolarised light is converted into plane
or I = I0 cos2 [as I0 = KA2] ....(2)
polarised light, its intensity reduces to half.
This law is called Malus law. From this it is clear that :
(C) Polarisation is a convincing proof of wave nature of
z
light.
A c os

Partially polarised light

If in case of unpolarised light, electric vector in some y
plane is either more or less; then in its perpendicular A sin
plane, the light is said to be partially polarised.

(A) If the incident light is unpolarised, then as vibrations

Methods of polarisation are equally probable in all directions (in a plane
UPL PPL perpendicular to the direction of wave-motion), 
1
I = p r can have any value from 0 to 2 and (cos2)av =
2

1
I= I
2 0

PL
i.e., If an unpolarised light is converted into plane
Partially polarised light its intensity becomes half.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.22 Theory and Exercise Book

(B) If light of intensity I1 emerging from one polaroid Polarisation by Scattering

called polariser is incident on a second polariod Polarisation also occurs when light is scattered while
(usually called analyser) the intensity of the light travelling through a medium. When light strikes the
emerging from the second polaroid in accordance atoms of a material, it will often set the electrons of
with Malus law will be given by those atoms into vibration. The vibrating electrons
then produce their own electromagnetic wave that is
I2 = I1 cos2
radiated outward in all directions. This newly generated
where ’ is the angle between the transmission axis wave strikes neighbour atoms, forcing their their
of the two polariods. electrons into vibrations at the same original frequency.
These vibrating electrons produce another
electromagnetic wave that is once more radiated outward
in all directions. This absorption and re-emission of light
waves causes the light to be scattered about the medium.

So if the two polaroids have their transmission axes Incident sunlight

parallel to each other, i.e.,  = 0º, (Unpolarised)
I2 = I1 cos20º = I1
and if the two polaroids are crossed, i.e., have their
transmission axes perpendicular to each other,  =
90º.
I2 = I1 cos2 90º = 0 Scattered light
(polarised)
So, if an analyser is rotated from 0º to 90º with
respect to polariser, the intensity of emergent light
To observer
changes from maximum value I1 to minimum value
zero.
Polarisation of blue scattered light from the sky
(C) Polarisation of Transverse Mechanical Waves This process of scattering contributes to the blueness of
If a transverse mechanical wave is passed through a our sky. This scattered light is partially polarised.
narrow slit, so that the plane of vibration of the wave Polarisation by scattering is observed as light passes through
our atmosphere. The scattered light oten produces a glare
is parallel to the slit, then the wave passes through
in the sky. The problem can easily be corrected by the
the slit with its vibrations being unaffected and the
use of a polaroid filter. As, thefilter is rotated, the partially
wave is said to be plane polarised.
polarised light is blocked and the glare is reduced.

Polarisation of Light by Reflection

When an unpolarised light is incident on the
boundary between two transparent media, the
reflected light is polarised with its electric field vector
perpendicular to the plane of incidence when the
Narrow slit
reflected and refracted rays make a right angle with
each other.

Resolving Power of Optical Instruments

Resolving power of an optical instrument is the ability
of the instrument to produce distinctly separate images
Transverse
disturbance Narrow slit of two close objects. According to Rayleigh, two point
(up and down) objects A and B will be just resolved, when central
maximum of diffraction pattern of B lies on first
Polarisation of transverse wave
secondary minimum of diffraction pattern of A.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.23

The minimum distance between two objects, which S1

can just be seen as separate by the optical instrument
is called the limit of resolution of the instrument. Objective
S2 of telescope

Not resolved Just resolved Fully resolved

Resolving power of a telescope
Obviously, smaller the limit of resolution of the optical
instrument, greater is its resolving power and vice-versa. 1 D
Resolving power = =
 1.22

Resolving Power of a Microscope

Resolving power depends on
(i) wavelength ,
The resolving power of a microscope is defined as
(ii) diameter of the objective D.
the reciprocal of the distance between two objects
which can be just resolved when seen through the
microscope.
Assume that light of wavelength 6000 Å is coming
Image
from a star. What is the limit of resolution of a
D
telescope whose objective has a diameter of 100
1.22f
Object f D inch ?
Sol. The diameter of the objective,
Objective D = 100 inch = 254 cm wavelength of light,
Object plane Image plane
 = 6000 Å = 6 × 10–5 cm
Real image formed by the objective the limit of resolution,
lens of the microscope
1.22 (1.22)(6  10 5 )
1   =  2.9 × 10–7 rad
D 254
REsolving power =
d

2 sin  Polaroids
= A polaroid is a material which polarises light.
1.22
Tourmaline is a natural polarising material. Polaroids
 sin  = numerical aperture
are now artificially made.
Resolving power depends on
(i) wavelength , Use of Polaroids
(ii) refractive index of the medium between the object (i) Polaroids are used in sunglasses.
and the objective (ii) To prepare filters.
(iii) half angle  of the cone of light from one of the (iii) For laboratory purpose.
object, i.e., . (iv) In head lights of automobiles.
(v) In three dimensional motion pictures.
Resolving Power of a Telescope (vi) Polaroids are fitted on the wind shield of the cars.
The resolving power of a telescope is defined as the (vii) To improve colour contrast in old paintings.
reciprocal of the smallest angular separation between
Note
two distant objects whose images are to be seen
separately.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.24 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

Section A - Interference Problems + 7. Two coherent monochromatic light beams of
Wavefronts & Hugen’s Principle intensities I and 4I are superposed. The maximum
and minimum possible intensities in the resulting
1. Monochromatic light is that light in which beam are:
(A) Single wavelength is present (A) 5I and I (B) 5I and 3I
(B) Various wavelengths are present (C) 9I and I (D) 9I and 3I
(C) Red and violet light is present
(D) Yellow and red light is present 8. When light is refracted into a denser medium,
(A) Its wavelength and frequency both increases
(B) Its wavelength increase but frequency remains
2. The resultant amplitude in interference with two
unchanged
coherent source depends upon – (C) Its wavelength decrease but frequency remains
(A) Intensity unchanged
(B) Only phase difference (D) Its wavelength and frequency both decrease
(C) On both the above
(D) None of the above 9. If the yellow light is replaced by the violet light then
the interference fringes-
3. Interference event is observed in (A) Will become fainter
(B) Will become brighter
(A) Only transverse waves
(C) The fringe width will increase
(B) Only longitudinal waves
(D) The fringe width will decrease
(C) Both types of waves
(D) Not observed in both type of waves 10. Figure, shows wave fronts in still water, moving in
the direction of the arrow towards the interface PQ
4. The path difference between two wavefronts between a shallow region and a deep (denser) region.
emitted by coherent sources of wavelength 5460 Å Which of the lines shown may represent one of the
is 2.1 micron . The phase difference between the wave fronts in the deep region ?
P
wavefronts at that point is – (A) I deep IV
(B) II shallow III
(A) 7.692 (B) 7.692 
(C) III II
7.692 7.692 (D) IV I
(C) (D)
 3
Q
Section B - YDSE Experiment
5. The path difference between two waves
11. In Young's double slit experiment 62 fringes are
y1= A1 sin t and y2= A2 cos (t + ) will be
visible in the field of view with sodium light ( =
(A) (/2)  (B) (/2) (+/2) 5893Å). If green light ( = 5461Å) is used then the
(C) (2/) (–2) (D) (2/)  number of visible fringes will be –
(A) 62 (B) 67
6. The necessary condition for phenomenon of (C) 85 (D) 58
interference to occur is
(A) There should be two coherent sources. 12. In Young's double slit experiment, the distance of
(B) The frequency and amplitude of both the waves the n-th dark fringe from the centre is –
should be same  D   2d 
(C) The propagation of waves should be (A) n   (B) n  
 2d   D 
simultaneously and in same direction
(D) All of the above D 4d
(C)  2n  1 (D) (2n-1)
2d D

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.25

13. In young's double slit experiment, interference pattern 18. In the YDSE shown the two slits are covered with
is observed on the screen L distance apart from slits, thin sheets having thickness t & 2t and refractive
average distance between adjacent fringes is x and index 2 and . Find the position (y) of central
slits separation is d, then the wavelength of light will maxima
be – (A) zero t,2
(B) tD/d y
(A) xd/ L (B) xL/d d
(C) Ld/x (D) Ldx (C) – tD/d
,2t
(D) None
D
14. Plane microwaves from a transmitter are directed
normally towards a plane reflector. A detector moves
Section C - Other Experiment (Fresnell’s
bilets, etc.)
along the normal to the reflector. Between positions
of 14 successive maxima, the detector travels a 19. The ratio of the intensity at the centre of a bright
distance 0.13 m. If the velocity of light is fringe to the intensity at a point one-quarter of the
fringwidth from the centre is
3 × 108 m/s, find the frequency of the transmitter.
(A) 2 (B) 1/2 (C) 4 (D) 16
(A) 1.5 × 1010 Hz (B) 1010 Hz
(C) 3 × 1010 Hz (D) 6 × 1010 Hz 20. In a biprism experiment the distance of source from
biprism is 1 m and the distance of screen from
15. In a young double slit experiment D equals the biprism is 4 meters. The angle of refraction of
distance of screen and d is the separation between biprism is 2 × 10–3 radians. of biprism is 1.5 and
the slit. The distance of the nearest point to the the wavelength of light used is 6000 Å. How many
central maximum where the intensity is same as that fringes will be seen on the screen?
due to a single slit, is equal to (A) 4 (B) 5
(C) 3 (D) 6
D D
(A) (B) 2d
d 21. In a fresnel biprism experiment, the two positions
of lens give separation between the slits as 16 cm
D 2 D and 9 cm respectively. What is the actual distance
(C) 3d (D)
d of separation?
(A) 12.5 cm (B) 12cm
16. A beam of light consisting of two wavelength 6300 (C) 13 cm (D) 14 cm
Å and  Å is used to obtain interference fringes in a
Young’s double slit experiment. If 4th bright fringe 22. Huygen’s concept of secondary waves
(A) allows us to find the focal length of a thick
of 6300 Å coincides with 5th dark fringe of  Å, the
lens.
value of  (in Å) is
(B) is a geometrical method to find a wave front.
(A) 5200 (B) 4800 (C) is used to explain polarisation.
(C) 6200 (D) 5600 (D) is used to determine the velolcity of light.

17. In YDSE, the source placed symmetrically with 23. A thin slice is cut out of a glass cylinder along a plane
respect to the slit is now moved parallel to the plane parallel to its axis. The slice is placed on a flat glass
of the slits so that it is closer to plate with the curved surface downwards.
the upper slit, as shown. Then, S Monochromatic light is incident normally from the top.
S1
(A) the fringe width will The observed interference fringes from this combination
S2 do not follow one of the following statements.
increase and fringe pattern will
(A) the fringes are straight and parallel to the length
shift down.
of the piece.
(B) the fringe width will remain same but fringe (B) the line of contact of the cylindrical glass piece
pattern will shift up. and the glass plate appears dark.
(C) the fringe width will decrease and fringe pattern (C) the fringe spacing increases as we go outwards.
will shift down. (D) the fringes are formed due to the interference of
(D) the fringe width will remain same but fringe light rays reflected from the curved surface of the
pattern will shift down. cylindrical piece and the top surface of the glass plate.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.26 Theory and Exercise Book

24. In a biprism experiment, coherent sources are (A) If both Statement - I and Statement - II are
obtained by which of the following phenomenon : true, and Statement - II is the correct explanation of
(A) refraction (B) reflection Statement- I.
(C) interference (D) diffraction (B) If both Statement-I and Statement - II are true
but Statement - II is not the correct
Section D - YDSE thin Film explanation of Statement-I.
(C) If Statement-I is true but Statement - II is false.
25. A circular planar wire loop is dipped in a soap (D) If Statement-I is false but Statement-II is true.
solution and after taking it out, held with its plane
vertical in air. Assuming thickness of film at the top 30. A diffraction pattern is produced by a single slit of
very small, as sunlight falls on the soap film, & width 0.5mm with the help of a convex lens of focal
observer receive reflected light. length 40cm. If the wave length of light used is
(A) the top portion appears dark while the first 5896Å. then the distance of first dark fringe from
colour to be observed as one moves down is red. the axis will be-
(B) the top portion appears violet while the first (A) 0.047 cm (B) 0.047 m
colour to be observed as one moves down is indigo. (C) 0.047 mm (D) 47 cm
(C) the top portion appears dark while the first colour
to be observed as one move down is violet. 31. Two polaroids as oriented with their planes
(D) the top portion appears dark while the first colour perpendicular to incident light and transmission axis
to be observed as one move down depends on the making an angle of 30º with each other. What fraction
refractive index of the soap solution. of incident unpolarised light is transmitted ?
26. When exposed to sunlight, thin films of oil on water (A) 20% (B) 45%
often exhibit brilliant colours due to the phenom- (C) 37.5% (D) 75%
enon of :
(A) interference (B) diffraction 32. The angle of incidence at which reflected light is
(C) dispersion (D) polarisation totally polarised for reflection from air to glass
(refractive index n) is -
(A) sin–1 (n) (B) sin–1 (1/n)
27. If white light is used in the Newton’s rings
(C) tan–1 (1/n) (D) tan–1 (n)
experiment, the colour observed in the reflected light
is complementary to that observed in the transmit- 33. A ray of unpolarised light is incident on a glass plate
ted light through the same point. This is due to at the polarising angle 57º. Then -
(A) 45° change of phase in one of the reflected waves. (A) the reflected ray and the transmitted ray both
(B) 90° change of phase in one of the reflected waves. will be completely polarised
(C) 135° change of phase in one of the reflected waves. (B) the reflected ray will be completely polarised
(D) 180° change of phase in one of the reflected waves. and the transmitted ray will be partially polarised
(C) the reflected ray will be partially polarised and
the transmitted ray will be completely polarised
28. A very thin transparent film of soap solution
(D) the reflected and transmitted both rays will be
(thickness  0) is seen under reflection of white
partially polarised
light. Then the colour of the film appear to be :
(A) blue (B) black 34. A ray of light is incident on the surface of a glass
(C) red (D) yellow plate at an angle of incidence equal to Brewster’s
angle . If  represents the refractive index of glass
Section E,F - Diffraction Single Slit + with respect to air, the angle between the reflected
Polarisation and refracted rays is -
(A) (90 + ) (B) sin–1 (m cos )
29. Statement-I : Light waves can be polarised.
 sin  
Statement-II: It is because light waves are (C) 90º (D) sin–1   
 
transverse in nature.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.27

Exercise - 2 (Level-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

Section A - Interference Problems + 7. Two wavefronts separated by a distance of /2 have
Wavefronts & Hugen’s Principle a phase difference of -
(A) 90° (B) 180°
1. The nature of light which is verified by the (C) 270° (D) 360°
interference event is –
(A) Particle nature (B) Wave nature Section B - YDSE Experiment
(C) Dual nature (D) Quantum nature
8. If the path difference between the interfering waves
is n, then the fringes obtained on the screen will
2. The phenomenon of interference is based on the
be
principle of –
(A) Dark (B) Bright
(A) Diffraction (B) Superposition
(C) coloured (D) White
(C) Refraction (D) Polarisation
9. The fringe width in a Young's double slit experiment
3. Two coherent sources have intensity ratio of 100 : can be increased. If we decrease
1, and are used for obtaining the phenomenon of (A) Width of the slits
interference. Then the ratio of maximum and (B) Separation of the slits
minimum intensity will be – (C) Wavelength of the light used
(A) 100 : 1 (B) 121 : 81 (D) Distance between slits and screen
(C) 1 : 1 (D) 5 : 1
10. In a YDSE, the central bright fringe can be
4. In coherent sources it is necessary that their identified.
(A) Amplitudes are same (A) as it has greater intensity than the other bright
fringes
(B) Wavelengths are same
(B) as it is wider than the other bright fringes
(C) Frequencies are same
(C) as it is narrower than the other bright fringes
(D) Initial phase remains constant
(D) by using white light instead of single wavelength
light.
5. The equation for two waves obtained by two light
sources are as given below : 11. In YDSE how many maxima can be obtained on
y1= A1 sin 3t, y2 = A2 cos (3t + /6). What will the screen if wavelength of light used is 200nm and
be the value of phase difference at the time t – d = 700 nm.
(A) 3/2 (B) 2/3 (A) 12 (B) 7
(C) (D) /2 (C) 18 (D) none of these

6. Two monochromatic and coherent point sources of 12. In Young’s double slit experiment, the wavelength
light are placed at a certain distance from each other of red light is 7800 Å and that of blue light is 5200
in the horizontal plane. The locus of all those points Å. The value of n for which nth bright band due to
in the horizontal plane which have construct red light coincides with (n + 1)th bright band due to
interference will be blue light, is
(A) a hyperbola (A) 1 (B) 2
(B) family of hyperbolas (C) 3 (D) 4
(C) family of straight lines
(D) family of parabolas

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.28 Theory and Exercise Book

13. If the Young’s double slit experiment is performed 18. In Young’s double slit arrangement, water is filled
with white light, then which of the following is not in the space between screen and slits. Then :
true (A) fringe pattern shifts upwards but fringe width
(A) the central maximum will be white remains unchanged.
(B) there will not be a completely dark fringe (B) fringe width decreases and central bright fringe
(C) the fringe next to the central will be red
shifts upwards.
(D) the fringe next to the central will be violet
(C) fringe width increases and central bright fringe
does not shift.
14. Two identical narrow slits S1 and S2 are illuminated
by light of wavelength  from a point source P. If, (D) fringe width decreases and central bright fringe
as shown in the diagram above the light is then does not shift.
allowed to fall on a screen, and if n is a positive
integer, the condition for destructive interference 19. Minimum thickness of a mica sheet having  = 3/2
at Q is that which should be placed in front of one of the slits in
YDSE is required to reduce the intensity at the
S1 centre of screen to half of maximum intensity is
l1 l3
(A) /4 (B) /8
P
(C) /2 (D) /3
l2
S2 l4 Q
20. In a Young’s Double slit experiment, first maxima
is observed at a fixed point P on the screen. Now
(A) (l1 – l2) = (2n + 1) /2
the screen is continuously moved away from the
(B) (l3 – l4) = (2n + 1) /2 plane of slits. The ratio of intensity at point P to the
(C) (l1 + l2) – (l2 + l4) = n intensity at point O (centre of the screen)
(D) (l1 + l3) – (l2 + l4) = (2n + 1) /2

P
15. In a Young’s double slit experiment, a small detector
O
measures an intensity of illumination of I units at
the centre of the fringe pattern. If one of the two
(identical) slits is now covered, the measured
intensity will be (A) remains constant
(A) 2I (B) I (B) keeps on decreasing
(C) I/4 (D) I/2 (C) first decreases and then increases
(D) First decreases and then becomes constant
16. In young’s double slit experiment, the value of  =
500 nm. The value of d = 1 mm, D = 1 m. Then the 21. In a double slit experiment, the separation between
minimum distance from central maximum for which
the slits is d = 0.25 cm and the distance of the screen
the intensity is half the maximum intensity will be
D = 100 cm from the slits. If the wavelength of
(A) 2.5 × 10–4 m (B) 2 × 10–4 m
–4
light used is  = 6000 Å and I0 is the intensity of the
(C) 1.25 × 10 (D) 10–4m
central bright fringe, the intensity at a distance
x = 4 × 10–5 m from the central maximum is
17. In the above question if the light incident is
monochromatic and point O is a maxima, then the (A) I0 (B) I0/2
wavelength of the light incident cannot be (C) 3I0/4 (D) I0/3
(A) d2 /3D (B) d2/6D
(C) d2/12D (D) d2/18D

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.29

22. Two slits are separated by 0.3 mm. A beam of 500 26. In double slit experiment fringes are obtained using
nm light strikes the slits producing an interference light of wavelength 4800 Å . One slit is covered
pattern. The number of maxima observed in the
with a thin glass film of refractive index. 1.4 and
angular range –30° <  < 30°.
another slit is covered by a film of same thickness
but refractive index. 1.7. By doing so the central
fringe is shifted to fifth bright fringe in the original
pattern. Find thickness of glass film in m.
(A) 6 (B) 8
(C) 10 (D) 4

(A) 300 (B) 150

27. A thin film of thickness t and index of refraction
(C) 599 (D) 149
1.33 coats a glass with index of refraction 1.50.
What is the least thickness t that will strongly reflect
23. Two coherent narrow slits emitting light of light with wavelength 600 nm incident normally?
wavelength  in the same phase are placed parallel (A) 225 nm (B) 300 nm
to each other at a small separation of 3. The light (C) 400 nm (D) 450 nm
is collected on a screen S which is placed at a
distance D (>> ) from the slits. The smallest
distance x such that the P is a maxima. 28. Huygen’s wave theory allows us to know :
(A) the wavelength of the wave
(A) 3D P
(B) the velocity of the wave
(B) 8D x (C) the amplitude of the wave
(D) the propagation of wavefronts.
(C) 5 D S1 S2 O

D
(D) 5 D 29. In Fresnel’s biprism, coherent sources are obtained
2
by :

24. Which one of the following phenomena is not ex- (A) division of wavefront
plained by Huygen’s construction of wavefront? (B) division of amplitude
(A) Refraction (B) Reflection (C) division of wavelength
(C) Diffraction (D) Origin of spectra
(D) none of the above

Section C,D - Other Experiment + YDSE thin

Film 30. In Fresnel’s birprism experiment, the two coherent
sources are :
25. What causes change in the colours of the soap or
oil films for the given beam of light? (A) real
(A) Angle of incidence (B) imaginary
(B) angle of reflection (C) one is real and other is imaginary
(C) thickness of film (D) none of the above
(D) none of the above

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.30 Theory and Exercise Book

31. In Fresnel’s biprism experiment, which of the 34. In Fresnel’s biprism experiment if the screen is
following light sources used to locate central moved away from the biprism, then the fringe width
fringe : will :
(A) sodium lamp (A) increase
(B) mono-chromatic source (B) decrease
(C) white light (C) remain same
(D) none of the above (D) cover the entire screen uniformly

32. In Fresnel’s biprism experiment, separation between 35. If the refracting angle of a biprism is increased then
the slits is halved and the distance between screen the effect on the interference pattern will be :
and the slit is doubled (A) fringes will be closer
(A) remain unchanged (B) fringe pattern will disappear
(B) be halved (C) fringe width will increase
(C) be doubled (D) fringe pattern will not be effected
(D) be four times
36. In a biprism experiment, when sodium light of
33. Fringe width equal to 1 mm is observed in the wavelength 5890Å is used then twenty fringes are
interference pattern of biprism experiment. Then the observed in 23 mm distance on screen. In order to
distance of nearest bright fringe from the central obtain 30 fringes in 28 mm of the interference
bright fringe will be : pattern, one should use light of wavelength :

(A) 1 mm (B) 0.5 mm (A) 4780 Å (B) 6161 Å

(C) 2 mm (D) 0.25 mm (C) 8835 Å (D) 4381 Å

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.31

Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

S ect ion A - Interference Problems + Section C,D - other Experiment + YDSE thin
Wavefronts & Hugen’s Principle Film
1. To observe a stationary interference pattern formed by 3. Consider a case of thin film interference as shown.
two light waves, it is not necessary that they must have Thickness of film is equal to wavelength of light is 2.
(A) the same frequency
(B) same amplitude 1

(C) a constant phase difference 2

(D) the same intensity
3
(A) Reflected light will be maxima if 1 < 2 < 3
Section B - YDSE Experiment
(B) Reflected light will be maxima if 1 < 2 > 3
2. In a YDSE apparatus, we use white light then :
(C) Transmitted light will be maxima if 1 > 2 > 3
(A) the fringe next to the central will be red
(D) Transmitted light will be maxima if 1 > 2 < 3
(B) the central fringe will be white.
(C) the fringe next to the central will be violet
(D) there will not be a completely dark fringe.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.32 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced

Section A - Interference Problems + Section B - YDSE Experiment

Wavefronts & Hugen’s Principle 7. In a Young’s double slit experiment for interference
of light, the slits are 0.2 cm apart and are illuminated
1. A ray of light of intensity I is incident on a parallel
by yellow light ( = 600 nm). What would be the
glass-slab at a point A as shown in figure. It
fringe width on a screen placed 1 m from the plane of slits
undergoes partial reflection and refraction. At each if the whole system is immersed in water of index 4/3?
reflection 20% of incident energy is reflected. The
rays AB and A’B’ undergo interference. Find the 8. In Young’s double slit experiment, 12 fringes are
ratio Imax/Imin. observed to be formed in a certain segment of the
screen when light of wavelength 600 nm is used. If the
B B' wavelength of the light is changed to 400 nm, find the
number of fringes observed in the same segment.
A A'

9. On slit of double slit experiment is covered by a thin

glass plate of refractive index 1.4 and the other by a
thin glass plate of refractive index 1.7. The point on
the screen, where central bright fringe was formed
before the introduction of the glass sheets, is now
2. Two point source separated by d = 5m emit light
occupied by the 5th bright fringe. Assuming that both
of wavelength  = 2m in A
the glass plates have same thickness and wavelength
phase. A circular wire of radius of light used is 4800 Å, find their thickness.
20m is placed around the D B

source as shown in figure. 10. In a YDSE apparatus, d = 1mm,  = 600 nm and D =

Which point are dark and bright. C
1m. The slits produce same intensity on the screen Find
the minimum distance between two points on the screen
having 75% intensity of the maximum intensity.
3. Two monochromatic (wavelength = a/5) and coherent
sources of electromagnetic waves are placed on the
11. The distance between two slits in a YDSE apparatus is
x-axis at the points (2a, 0) and (–a, 0). A detector 3mm. The distance of the screen from the slits is 1m.
moves in a circle of radius R(>>2a) whose centre is Microwaves of wavelength 1 mm are incident on the
at the origin. The number of maximas detected during plane of the slits normally. Find the distance of the first
one circular revolution by the detector are maxima on the screen from the central maxima.

12. A long narrow horizontal slit lies 1 mm above a plane

4. A broad source of light of wavelength 680nm illuminates
mirror. The interference pattern produced by the
normally two glass plates 120 mm long that meet at
slit and its image is viewed on a screen distant 1 m
one end and are separated by a wire 0.048 mm in from the slit. The wavelength of light is 600nm.
diameter at the other end. Find the number of bright Find the distance of first maximum above the mirror.
fringes formed over the 120mm distance.
13. Light of wavelength 520 nm passing through a double
5. Consider interference between waves from two slit, produces interference pattern of relative intensity
sources of Intensites I & 4I. Find intensities at points versus deflection angle  as shown in the figure.
Find the separation d between the slits.
where the phase difference is .

6. Interference fringes are obtained due to interference of

waves from two coherent sources of light having
amplitude a1 and 2a1. The ratio of maximum and
minimum intensities in the interference pattern will be-

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.33

14. In Young’s double slit experiment the slits are 0.5 mm

apart and the interference is observed on a screen at a
distance of 100 cm from the slit. It is found that the
9th bright fringe is at a distance of 7.5 mm from the
second dark fringe from the centre of the fringe pattern
on same side. Find the wavelength of the light used.

15. One method of producing two in-phase point sources

of light for interference is to form two images of a (i) If the third intensity maximum occurs at the point
point source by means of the two halves of a lens, A on the screen, find the distance OA.
which has been split along a diameter. (ii) If the gap between L1 & L2 is reduced from its
original value of 0.5 mm, will the distance OA
increase, decrease or remain the same?

18. A parallel coherent beam of light falls on fresnel

biprism of refractive index  and angle . The fringe
width on a screen at a distance D from biprism will
be (wavelength = )

(a) How must the two halves of a 5 cm focal length 19. Figure shown plane waves refracted for air to water using
lens be placed to form two real image sources 0.24 Huygen’s principle a, b, c, d, e are lengths on the diagram.
cm apart and 20 cm from the source? The refractive index of water wrt air is the ratio.
(b) A screen is placed perpendicular to the principal
axis and 80 cm from the image sources. What is the a b
air c
width of central maxima formed on the screen, if e
the wavelength of the light used is 5.4×10-5 cm?

Section C,D - Other Experiment + YDSE thin 20. A lens ( = 1.5) is coated with a thin film of refractive
Film
index 1.2 in order to reduce the reflection from its
16. In a biprism experiment using sodium light surface at  = 4800 Å. Find the minimum thickness
 = 6000 Å an interference pattern is obtained in of the film which will minimize the intensity of the
which 20 fringes occupy 2 cm. On replacing sodium reflected light.
light by another source of wavelength 2 without
making any other change 30 fringes occupy 2.7 cm 21. In the figure shown if a parallel beam of white light
on the screen. What is the value of 2 ? is incident on the plane of the slits then the distance
of the white spot on the screen from O is
17. In the figure shown S is a monochromatic point
[Assume d << D,  << d]
source emitting light of wavelength = 500 nm. A
thin lens of circular shape and focal length 0.10 m is
cut into two identical halves L1 and L2 by a plane
passing through a diameter. The two halves are d 2d/3
O
placed symmetrically about the central axis SO with
a gap of 0.5 mm. The distance along the axis from
D
S to L1 and L2 is 0.15 m, while that from L1 & L2 to
O is 1.30 m. The screen at O is normal to SO.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.34 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced

Section A - Interference Problems + 6. A monochromatic light of  = 5000 Å is incident on
Wavefronts & Hugen’s Principle two slits separated by a distance of 5 × 10–4 m. The
interference pattern in seen on a screen placed at a
1. Two waves are represented by distance of 1 m from the slits. A thin glass plate of
y1 = a1 cos (t – kx) and thickness 1.5 × 10–6 m & refractive index  = 1.5 is
y2 = a2 sin(t – kx + /3) placed between one of the slits & the screen. Find
Then the phase difference between them is- the intensity at the centre of the screen, if the intensity
there is I0 in the absence of the plate. Also find the
2. Disturbances of two waves are shown as a function of lateral shift of the central maximum.
time in the following figure. The ratio of their intensi-
ties will be - 7. A double-slit apparatus is immersed in a liquid of
refractive index 1.33. It has slit separation of 1mm
& distance between the plane of the slits & screen
II is 1.33 m. The slits are illuminated by a parallel
2a I beam of light whose wavelength in air is 6300 Å.
y a (a) Calculate the fringe width.
t
(b) One of the slits of the apparatus is covered by a
thin glass sheet of refractive index 1.53. Find the
smallest thickness of the sheet to bring the adjacent
minima on the axis.
3. Two coherent sources y
separated by distance d 8. A young’s double slit experiment is performed using
are radiating in ph ase light of wavelength  = 5000 Å, which emerges in
d x
having wavelength  and phase from two slits a distance d = 3 × 10–7m apart. A
S1 S2
transparent sheet of thickness t = 1.5 × 10–7m is placed
are placed on x-axis
over one of the slits. The refractive index of the material
symmetrically about the
of this sheet is  = 1.17. Where does the central
origin A detector moves in
maximum of the interference pattern now appear ?
a big circle (centre origin) around the two sources
in the plane of the two sources. The angular position
of n = 4 interference maxima is given as Section C,D - Other Experiment + YDSE thin
Film

4. Light of wavelength  in air enters a medium of 9. In a biprism experiment with

refractive index . Two points in this medium, lying sodium light, bands of width of
along the path of this light, are at a distance x apart. 0.0195 cm are observed at 100 cm
The phase difference between these points is : from slit. On introducing a convex S1 O S2

lens 30 cm away from the slit

between and screen, two images
Section B - YDSE Experiment of the slit are seen 0.7 cm apart at 100 cm distance
5. In a two-slit experiment with monochromatic light, from the slit. Calculate the wavelength of sodium light.
fringes are obtained on a screen placed at some
distance from the slits. If the screen is moved by 10. It is necessary to coat a glass lens with a non-
5 × 10–2 m towards the slits, the change in fringe reflecting layer. If the wavelength of the light in the
width is 3 × 10–5. If the distance between the slits is coating is , the best choice is a layer of material
10–3m, calculate the wavelength of the light used. having an index of refraction between those of glass
and air and a thickness of

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.35

Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main

1. When an unpolarized light of intensity I 0 is incident 7. This question has a paragraph followed by two
statements, Statement I and Statement II. Of the given
on a polarizing sheet, the intensity of the light which
four alternatives after the statements, choose the one
does not get transmitted is (AIEEE 2005) that describes the statements.A thin air film is formed
1 1 by putting the convex surface of a plane-convex lens
(A) I (B) I
2 0 4 0 over a plane glass plate. With monochromatic light,
(C) zero (D) I 0 this film gives an interference pattern due to light
reflected from the top (convex) surface and the bottom
(glass plate) surface of the film. (AIEEE 2011)
2. If I0 is the intersity of the principal maximum in the Statement I : When light reflects from the air-glass plate
single slit diffraction pattern, then what will be its intensity interface, the reflected wave suffers a phase change or  .
when the slit width is doubled ? (AIEEE 2005) Statement II : The centre of the inerference pattern is dark.
I0 (A) Statement I is true, Statement II is true,
(A) 2I0 (B) 4I0 (C) I0 (D) Statement II is the correct explanationof Statement I
2 (B)Statement I is true, Statement II is true,
3. A Young's double slit experiment uses a monochromatic Statement II is not the correct explana tion of
source. The shape of the interference fringes formed on Statement I
a screen is (AIEEE 2005) (C) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
(D) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
(A) hyperbola (B) circle
(C) straight line (D) parabola 8. In a Young's double slit experiment, the two slits
act as coherent source of waves of equal amplitude
4. In a Young's double slit experiment the intensity at a
A and wavelength . In another experiment with

point where the path difference is ( being the the same arrangement the two slits are made to act
6  as incoherent sources of waves of same amplitude
wavelength of the light used) is I. If I0 denotes the
and wavelength. If the intensity at the middle point
I of the screen in first case is I1 and in the second
maximum intensity,
I 0 is equal to (AIEEE 2007) I1
case I2, then the ratio
1 3 1 3 I 2 is ( AIEEE 2011)
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 2 2 4 (A) 4 (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) 0.5

5. A mixture of light, consisting of wavelength 590 nm 9. At two points P and Q on screen in Young's double
and an unknown wavelength, illuminates Young's double slit expereiment, waves from slits S1 and S2 have a
slit and gives rise to two overlapping interference patterns 
path difference of 0 and respectively. The ratio
on the screen. The central maximum of both lights 4
of intensities at P and Q will be (AIEEE 2011)
coincide. Further, it is observed that the third bright (A) 3 :2 (B) 2 : 1
fringe of known light coincides with the 4th bright fringe
(C) 2 :1 (D) 4 : 1
of the unknown light. From this data, the wavelength
of the unknown light is (AIEEE 2009) 10. In Young's double slit experiment, one of the slit is
(A) 393.4 nm (B) 885.0 nm wider than other, so that amplitude of the light from
(C) 442.5 nm (D) 776.8 nm one slit is double of that from other slit. If Im be the
maximum intensity, the resultant intensity I when
6. The initial shape of the wave front of the beam is very interfere at phase difference , is given by
(AIEEE 2010) (AIEEE 2012)
(A) convex Im Im 
(A) (4  5cos ) (B) (1  2cos2 )
(B) concave 9 3 2
(C)convex near the axis and concave near the periphery Im  Im 
(D) planer (C) (1  4 cos2 ) (D) (1  8 cos2 )
5 2 9 2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.36 Theory and Exercise Book

11. A beam of unpolarised light of intensity I0 is passed  22 

through a polaroid A and then through another (A) a  L and bmin   L 
 
polaroid B which is oriented so that its principal plane
makes an angle of 45° relative to that of A. The (B) a  L and bmin  4 L
intensity of the emergent light is : (AIEEE 2013) 2
(A) I0 /4 (B) I0 /8 (C) I0 (D) I0 /2 (C) a  and bmin  4L
L
2
  22 
12. Two coherent point sources S1 and S2 are separated (D) a  L and bmin   L 
by a small distance 'd' as shown. The fringes obtained  

on the screen will be : (AIEEE 2013) 17. On a hot summer night, the refractive index of air is
smallest near the ground and increases with height
from the ground. When a light beam is directed
horizontally, the Huygens' principle leads us to conclude
S1 S2
Screen
that as it travels, the light beam : [JEE MAIN 2016]
(A) bends downwards
D
(B) bends upwards
(A) semi-circles (B) concentric circles (C) becomes narrower
(C) points (D) straight lines (D) goes horizontally without any deflection
13. Two beams, A and B, of plane polarized light with
18. In a Young’s double slit experiment, slits are
mutually perpendicular planes of polarization are seen
separated by 0.5 mm, and the screen is placed 150
through a polaroid. From the position when the beam A
cm away. A beam of light consisting of two
has maximum intensity (and beam B has zero intensity),
wavelengths, 650 nm and 520 nm, is used to obtain
a rotation of polaroid through 30º makes two beams
interference fringes on teh screen. The least
appear equally bright. If the initial intensities of the two
distance from the common central maximum to the
IA point where the bright fringes due to both the
beams are IA and IB respectively, then I equals :
B wavelength concide is : [JEE MAIN 2017]
[JEE MAIN 2014] (A) 15.6 mm (B) 1.56 mm
1 3 (C) 7.8 mm (D) 9.75 mm
(A) 1 (B) (C) 3 (D)
3 2
14. Diameter of a plano–convex lens is 6 cm and 19. Unpolarized light of intensity I passes through an
thickness at the centre is 3 mm. If speed of light in ideal polarizer A. Another identical polarizer B is
material of lens is 2 × 108 m/s, the focal length of placed behind A. The intensity of light beyond B is
the lens is [JEE Mains 2014] 1
found to be . Now another identical polarizer C
(A) 15 cm (B) 20 cm 2
(C) 30 cm (D) 10 cm is placed between A and B. The intensity beyond B
1
15. Assuming human pupil to have a radius of 0.25 cm is now found to be . The angle between polarizer
8
and a comfortable viewing distance of 25 cm, the A and C is : [JEE MAIN 2018]
minimum separation between two objects that (A) 60° (B) 0°
human eye can resolve at 500 nm wavelength is : (C) 30° (D) 45°
[JEE MAIN 2015]
(A) 100 µm (B) 300 µm 20. The angular width of the central maximum in a single
(C) 1 µm (D) 30 µm slit diffraction pattern is 60°. The width of the slit is
1 m. The slit is illuminated by monochromatic plane
16. The box of a pin hole camera, of length L, has a waves. if another slit of same width is made near it,
hole of radius a. It is assumed that when the hole is Young's fringes can be observed on a screen placed
illuminated by a parallel beam of light of wavelength at a distance 50 cm from the slits. If the observed
 the spread of the spot (obtained on the opposite fringe width is 1 cm, what is slit separation distance ?
wall of the camera) is the sum of its geometrical (i.e., distance between the centres of each slit)
spread and the spread due to diffraction, The spot [JEE MAIN 2018]
would then have its minimum size (say bmin) when : (A) 100 m (B) 25 m
[JEE MAIN 2016] (C) 50 m (D) 75 m

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.37

Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced

1. In Young’s double slit experiment maximum intensity b
d
is I than the angular position where the intensity
becomes 1/4 is - [JEE’ 2005 (Scr)] medium-1
a c
X Y
f h

–1  
–1 
(A) sin  d  (B) sin  3d 
medium-2

e g
–1 
–1 
(C) sin  2d  (D) sin  4d 
4. Light travels as a -
(A) parallel beam in each medium
(B) convergent beam in each medium
2. AB and CD are two slabs. The medium between the
slabs has refractive index 2. Find the minimum angle (C) divergent beam in each medium
of incidence of Q, so that the ray is totally reflected by (D) divergent beam in one medium and convergent
both the slabs. [JEE Advance 2005, 2M] beam in the other medium [JEE 2007]

5. The phases of the light wave at c, d, e and f are c,

A Q  2 B d, e and f respectively. It is given that c  f .
(A) c cannot be equal to d [JEE 2007]
(B) d can be equal to e
2
(C) (d – f) is equal to (c – e)
(D) (d – c) is not equal to (f – e)
P C  3 D

6. Speed of light is [JEE 2007]

(A) the same in medium-1 and medium - 2
(B) larger in medium - 1than in medium - 2
(C) larger in medium-2 than in medium-1
3. A biconvex lens of focal length f forms a circular
(D) different at b and d
image of radius r of sun in focal plane. Then which
option is correct ? [JEE Advance 2006, 3M] 7. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the separation
(A) r2  f (B) r2  f2 between the two slits is d and the wavelength of the
(C) If lower half part is converted by black sheet, light is . The intensity of light falling on slit 1 is
then area of the imge is equal to r2/2 four times the intensity of light falling on slit 2.
Choose the correct choice(s). [JEE 2008]
(D) If f is doubled, intensity will increase.
(A) If d = , the screen will contain only one maximum
(B) If  < d < 2, at least one more maximum (besides
Paragraph for Question Nos. 4 to 6 (3 questions) the central maximum) will be observed on the screen

The figure shows a surface XY separating two (C) If the intensity of light falling on slit 1 is reduced
so that it becomes equal to that of slit 2, the intensities
transparent media, medium-1 and medium-2. The
of the observed dark and bright fringes will increase.
lines ab and cd represent wavefronts of a light wave
(D) If the intensity of light falling on slit 2 is increased
traveling in medium-1 and incident on XY. The lines
so that it becomes equal to that of slit 1, the intensities
ef and gh represent wavefronts of the light wave in
of the observed dark the bright fringes will increase.
medium-2 after refraction.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.38 Theory and Exercise Book

8. Column I shows four situations of standard Young’s 9. A light ray traveling in glass medium is incident on
double slit arrangement with the screen placed far away glass-air interface at an angle of incidence . The
from the slits S1 and S2 . In each of these cases S1 P0 = S2 reflected (R) and transmitted (T) intensities, both as
P0 , S1 P1 – S2 P1 =  / 4 and S1 P2 – S2 P2 = /3, where function of  are plotted. The correct sketch is
 is the wavelength of the light used. In the cases B,C and [JEE 2011]
D, a transparent sheet of refractive index  and thickness
t is pasted on slit S2 . The thicknesses of the sheets are 100%
different in different cases. The phase difference between T

Intensity
the light waves reaching a point P on the screen from the
two slits is denoted by (P) and the intensity by I (P). (A)
Match each situation given in Column I with the
statement(s) in Column II valid for that situation. R
[JEE 2009] 0 90°
Column I Column II
100%
T

Intensity
S2 P2
P1
P0
(B)
(A) (P)  (P0) = 0
S1
R
0 90°

100%
T
S2 P2
Intensity

P1
 P0
(B) ( – 1) t = (Q) (P1) = 0 (C)
4 S1

R
0 90°

100%
S2 P2 T
P1

Intensity

P0
(C) ( – 1) t = (R) I (P1) = 0
2 S1
(D)

R
0 90°
S2 P2 10. Young's double slit experiment is carried out by using
3 P1 green, red and bluelight, one color at a time. The
(D)(–1)t= P0 (S) I(P0) > I(P1)
4 fringe widths recorded are  G ,  R and   ,
S1
respectively. Then. [JEE 2012]
(A)  G >  B >  R (B)  B >  G >  R
>
(C)  R  B >  G (D)  R >  G >  B
(T) I(P2) > I(P1)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Wave Optics 2.39

11. In the young's double slit experiment using a of S1S2, as shown schematically in the figure. The
monochromatic light of wavelength , the path distance between the sources d = 0.6003 mm. The
difference (in terms of an integer n) corresponding to origin O is at the intersection of the screen and the
any point having half the peak intensity is : line joining S1S2. Which of the following is (are)
[JEE 2013] true of the intensity pattern of the screen ?
  [JEE Advance 2016]
(A) 2n  1 (B) 2n  1
2 4
 
(C)  2n  1 (D) 2n  1
8 16

Screen
z
12. Using the expression 2d sin  = , one calculates the
values of d by measuring the corresponding angles  O
y
in the range 0 to 90°. the wavelength  is exactly S1 S2
known and the error in  is constant for all values of x
d
. As  increases from 0°. [JEE Advance 2013] d
(A) the absolute error in d remains constant
(B) the absolute in d increases (A) Straight bright and dark bands parallel to the
(C) the fractional error in d remains constant x-axis
(D) the fractional error in d decreases
(B) The region very close to the point O will be dark
13. A light source, which emits two wavelengths 1 = (C) Hyperbolic bright and dark bands with foci
400nm and 2 = 600 nm, is used in a Young’s double symmetrically placed about O in the x-direction
slit experiment. If recorded fringe widths for 1 and
(D) Semi circular bright and dark bands centered
2 are  1 and  2 and the number of fringes from
them within a distance y on one side of the central at point O
maximum are m1 and m2 respectively, then
(A)  2> 1 (B) m1>m2
16. Two coherent monochromatic point sources S1 and
(C) From the central maximum, 3rd maximum of
S2 of wavelength  = 600 nm are placed symmetri-
2 overlaps with 5th minimum of 1
(D) The angular separation of fringes from 1 is cally on either side of the center of the circle as
greater than 2. [JEE 2014] shown. The sources are separated by a distance d
= 1.8mm. This arrangement produces interference
14. A young’s double slit interference arrangement with slits fringes visible as alternate bright and dark spots on
S1 and S2 is immersed in water (refractive index = 4/3) the circumference of the circle. The angular sepa-
as shown in the figure. The positions of maxima on the ration between two consecutive bright spots is
surface of water are given by x2 = p2m22–d2, where  .Which of the following options is/are correct?
is the wavelenght of light in air (refractive index = 1), 2d
P1
is the separation between the slits and m is an interger.
The value of p is [JEE Advance 2015]

P2
S1 S2
d

(A) The angular separation between two consecu-

tive bright spots decreases as we move from P1 to
P2 along the first quadrant
15. While conducting the Young’s double slit experiment,
(B) At P2 the order of the fringe will be maximum
a student replaced the two slits with a large opaque
plate in the x-y plane containing two small holes (C) A dark spot will be formed at the point P2.
that act as two coherent point sources (S 1,S 2) (D) The total number of fringes produced between
emitting light of wavelength 600 nm. The student P1 and P2 in the first quadrant is close to 3000.
mistakenly placed the screen parallel to the x-z plane [JEE Advance 2017]
(for z > 0) at a distance D = 3 m from the mid-point
2.40 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

1. A 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. B 6. D 7. C
8. C 9. C 10. A 11. B 12. C 13. A 14. A
15. C 16. D 17. D 18. B 19. A 20. B 21. B
22. B 23. C 24 A 25. C 26. A 27. D 28. B
29. A 30. A 31. C 32. D 33. B 34. C

Exercise - 2 (Level-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

1. B 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. B 6. A 7. B
8. B 9. B 10. D 11. B 12. B 13. C 14. D
15. C 16. C 17. A 18. D 19. C 20. C 21. C
22. C 23. D 24. D 25. C 26. B 27. A 28. D
29. A 30. B 31. C 32. D 33. A 34. A 35. A
36. A

Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

1. BD 2. BCD 3. AD

Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced

1. 81:1 2. Bright A, C and Dark B, D 3. 60 4. 141
5. I 6. 9 7. 0.225 mm 8. 18 9. 8mm
10. 0.2mm 11. 35.35cm
12. 0.15 mm 13. 1.98×10 -2 mm 14. 5000 Å
15. 0.12 cm, 1.8 × 10-2 cm 16. 5400 Å 17. (i) 1 mm (ii) increase

18. 19. b/d 20. 10-7 m 21. d/6
2(  1)

Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced

 4 2  x
1. 2. 1:1 3. cos 1 4.
6 d 
5. 6000 Å 6. 0, 1.5mm 7. 0.63 mm, 1.575 mm
8. y = 0.085 D; D = distance between screen & slits 9. l = 5850 Å 10. /4

Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main

1. A 2. C 3. D 4. D 5. C
6. D 7. B 8. B 9. B 10. D
11. A 12. B 13. B 14. C 15. D
16. B 17. B 18. C 19. D 20. B

Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced

1. B 2. 60° 3. B 4. A 5. C
6. B 7. A,B 8. (A)  (ps), (B) (q), (C) (t), (D)  (rst)
9. C 10. D 11. B 12. D 13. A,B,C
14. 3 15. B, D 16. B, D

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43